Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Acknowledgement
This Structural Design of G+5 building opportunity we had was a great chance for learning and
professional development. Therefore, we consider ourselves as a very lucky individual as we
were provided with an opportunity to be a part of it.
Bearing in mind, we are using this opportunity to express our deepest gratitude and special thanks
to our instructor, Eng. Tadesse Chane, who gave us to work on this project.
We perceive as this opportunity as a big milestone in our career development. We will strive to
use gained skills and knowledge in the best possible way, and we will continue to work on their
improvement, in order to attain desired career objectives. Hope to continue cooperation with all of
you in the future.

AAiT Page i
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Abstract
Now a day’s construction industry plays a great role for the development of a nation in all aspects.
As we all agree, behind every construction activity there must have structural analysis and design,
from this consideration directly or indirectly structural analysis and design have a huge application
in the development of a nation.
This thesis works on the structural analysis and design of G+5 residential building with
commentaries by the new Ethiopian building code of standard ES EN 2015 based on what we have
studied in the past academic years.
The thesis will have an objective to develop new skill, strength our capacity on structural analysis
and design as well as integrate different discipline for specified and justified problem. Beside this,
it will create awareness for others to develop this project idea for civil engineering profession.
This paper contains nine chapters; the first one is the general introduction and material properties.
The second and the third chapters deal with the design of solid slab and stairs on the structure.
Chapter four and five are about the lateral i.e. wind and earth quake analysis. Whereas chapter six
deals with the frame analysis of the building. The next two chapters concern about the design of
structural members i.e. beam and column.

AAiT Page ii
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Table of Contents
Acknowledgement ........................................................................................................................... i
Abstract ........................................................................................................................................... ii
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................ vii
List of Figures ................................................................................................................................ ix
Chapter 1: Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Background ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 Mechanics of reinforced concrete .................................................................................... 1
1.3 Design philosophies ......................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Design criteria according to ES EN 1992:2015 ............................................................... 4
1.5 Design situations .............................................................................................................. 5
1.6 Material ............................................................................................................................ 5
1.6.1 Concrete .................................................................................................................... 5
1.6.2 Reinforcing steel ....................................................................................................... 9
1.7 General description of the building ................................................................................ 10
Chapter 2: Slab Analysis and Design............................................................................................ 13
2.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 13
2.2 Design and Analysis of Solid Slab. ................................................................................ 13
2.2.1 Type of slab............................................................................................................. 13
2.2.2 Design for cover ...................................................................................................... 15
2.2.3 Slab Depth Determination (Deflection requirement) .............................................. 18
2.2.4 Slab load Determination ......................................................................................... 20
2.2.5 Analysis of two way slabs....................................................................................... 23
2.2.6 Restrained slab with unequal conditions at adjacent panels ................................... 26
2.2.7 Flexural Reinforcement Design of the Slab ............................................................ 30
2.2.8 Design for shear ...................................................................................................... 34
2.3 Load transfer from slab to beam .................................................................................... 37
2.4 Load transfer from the cantilever parts of the slab to beam ........................................... 39
Chapter 3: Analysis and Design of staircase................................................................................. 40
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 40
3.1.1 Classification of staircase ....................................................................................... 41

AAit Page iii

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
3.1.2 Detailing of landing going junction ........................................................................ 44
3.2 Analysis and design of staircase..................................................................................... 45
3.2.1 Depth of deflection ................................................................................................. 46
3.2.2 Stairs loading .......................................................................................................... 47
3.2.3 Design of staircase for flexure ................................................................................ 51
3.2.4 Design of staircase for shear ................................................................................... 54
3.2.5 Load transfer from staircase to beam ...................................................................... 57
Chapter 4: Wind load analysis and roof design ............................................................................ 59
4.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 59
4.2 Analysis of wind load on the roof .................................................................................. 59
4.2.1 Wind parameter ....................................................................................................... 59
4.2.2 Wind pressure on surfaces ...................................................................................... 63
4.3 Analysis and design of purlin ......................................................................................... 70
4.3.1 Purlin loading .......................................................................................................... 71
4.3.2 Load transfer to purlin ............................................................................................ 72
4.3.3 Load combination for purlin ................................................................................... 72
4.3.4 Maximum bending moment and shear on the members result from
SAP2000v19.2.0 ................................................................................................................... 74
4.3.5 Comparison between lattice purlin and standard RHS purlin ................................. 75
4.3.6 Serviceability limit state (Deflection requirement) ................................................. 76
4.4 Truss analysis and design ............................................................................................... 76
Chapter 5: Design for Earthquake Resistance............................................................................... 81
5.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 81
5.2 Earth quake analysis ....................................................................................................... 81
5.2.1 Lateral force method of analysis ............................................................................. 81
5.2.2 Modal response spectrum analysis.......................................................................... 82
5.2.3 Non-linear methods ................................................................................................. 82
5.3 Base shear force ............................................................................................................. 84
5.3.1 Design spectrum for elastic analysis ....................................................................... 84
5.3.2 The total mass of the building ................................................................................. 86
5.4 Distribution of horizontal seismic force ......................................................................... 89

AAiT Page iv
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Chapter 6: Frame Analysis............................................................................................................ 91
6.1 Accidental torsional effects ............................................................................................ 91
6.2 Stiffness modifiers.......................................................................................................... 91
6.3 Load combination ........................................................................................................... 92
6.4 Geometric imperfection.................................................................................................. 99
6.5 Safety verification ........................................................................................................ 102
6.5.1 Ultimate limit state ................................................................................................ 102
6.5.2 Damage limitation requirement ............................................................................ 104
Chapter 7: Beam Analysis and Design ....................................................................................... 106
7.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................. 106
7.1.1 Basic principles and assumptions ......................................................................... 106
7.2 Preliminary analysis and beam sizing .......................................................................... 107
7.2.1 Design for cover .................................................................................................... 107
7.2.2 Depth and width .................................................................................................... 108
7.3 Analysis of beam section (bending moment and shear force) ..................................... 109
7.4 Design of beam section for ultimate limit state............................................................ 109
7.4.1 Effective width of flange ...................................................................................... 110
7.4.2 Design for flexure ................................................................................................. 112
7.4.3 Design for shear .................................................................................................... 115
7.5 Design of beam section for serviceability limit state ................................................... 120
7.5.1 Flexural crack control ........................................................................................... 120
7.6 Anchorage length and lap length .................................................................................. 128
7.6.1 Ultimate bond stress .............................................................................................. 128
7.6.2 Basic anchorage length ......................................................................................... 129
7.6.3 Design anchorage length ....................................................................................... 129
7.6.4 Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for beams ....................................... 130
7.6.5 Lab length ............................................................................................................. 130
Chapter 8: Column Design.......................................................................................................... 132
8.1 Classification of columns ............................................................................................. 132
8.2 Braced and unbraced columns...................................................................................... 133
8.3 Second order effects on columns ................................................................................. 133

AAiT Page v
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
8.3.1 Simplified criteria for second order effects........................................................... 133
8.4 Design for cover ........................................................................................................... 135
8.4.1 Check for fire resistance ....................................................................................... 136
8.5 Longitudinal reinforcement .......................................................................................... 136
8.5.1 First order moment ................................................................................................ 137
8.5.2 Effective length and radius of gyration ................................................................. 138
8.5.3 slenderness ratio, slenderness limit and check for second order effect ................ 140
8.5.4 accidental eccentricity ........................................................................................... 141
8.5.5 equivalent first order moment ............................................................................... 142
8.5.6 Calculate 𝐴𝑠 using 𝑀𝐸𝐷 ....................................................................................... 144
8.6 Transverse reinforcement ............................................................................................. 146
8.7 Detailing ....................................................................................................................... 147
8.7.1 Lap length ............................................................................................................. 147
8.7.2 Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for columns .................................... 147

AAiT Page vi
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

List of Tables
Table 1-1 commentary properties of concrete and steel ................................................................. 1
Table 2-1 Determination of type of slab ....................................................................................... 14
Table 2-2 Effective depth of the slab with their respective panels ............................................... 19
Table 2-3 Sample dead load calculation on panel 1 ..................................................................... 21
Table 2-4 summery calculation of dead loads on slabs ................................................................ 21
Table 2-5 imposed loads under category A building .................................................................... 22
Table 2-6 summery calculation of design loads on slabs.............................................................. 23
Table 2-7 summery calculation of unadjusted span and support bending moments .................... 24
Table 2-8 summery bending moment calculation for cantilever slabs ......................................... 25
Table 2-9 Adjusted support moment on axis ‘B’ .......................................................................... 28
Table 2-10 Moment adjustment on axis “C” between axis “2” and “3” ....................................... 28
Table 2-11 Adjusted support moment........................................................................................... 29
Table 2-12 Adjusted span moment ............................................................................................... 29
Table 2-13 summery of flexural design of panels......................................................................... 34
Table 2-14 Un-factored dead load transferred from two-way panels of the slab to beam ............ 38
Table 2-15 Un-factored live load transferred from two-way panels of the slab to beam ............. 38
Table 2-16 Un-factored dead and live loads from the cantilever part of the slab to the supporting
beams ............................................................................................................................................ 39
Table 3-1 Material used with their unit weight and thickness ...................................................... 47
Table 3-2 Loads transferred from stair to beam ........................................................................... 58
Table 4-1 wind condition parameter ............................................................................................. 64
Table 4-2 External pressure coefficients, wind direction ϴ = 0 ................................................... 66
Table 4-3 External pressure coefficients, wind direction ϴ = 90 ................................................. 66
Table 4-4 External wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 0 .............................................................. 66
Table 4-5 External wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 90 ............................................................ 67
Table 4-6 Internal wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 0 ............................................................... 68
Table 4-7 Internal wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 90 ............................................................. 68
Table 4-8 Net wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 0 ...................................................................... 69
Table 4-9 Net wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 90 .................................................................... 70
Table 4-10 Mechanical properties of the steel section. ................................................................. 71

AAiT Page vii

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 4-11 selected EGA sheet 300 .............................................................................................. 72
Table 4-12 Maximum bending moment (at the mid span)............................................................ 74
Table 4-13 Maximum shear force (support) ................................................................................. 74
Table 4-14 Mass calculation of lattice purlin ............................................................................... 75
Table 4-15 Vertical deflection calculation .................................................................................... 76
Table 4-16 Loads supported by the truss. ..................................................................................... 77
Table 4-17 Loads at each joints of the load .................................................................................. 78
Table 4-18 Sizing of truss members ............................................................................................. 80
Table 5-1 Type 2 elastic response spectra for ground type A....................................................... 85
Table 5-2 Weight summery of typical floor and its mass center .................................................. 87
Table 5-3 Weight summery of roof and its mass center ............................................................... 88
Table 5-4 Summary of strorey weight with their mass center ...................................................... 88
Table 5-5 Distribution of seismic force ........................................................................................ 89
Table 6-1 Accidental eccentricity ................................................................................................. 91
Table 6-2 Transverse forces due to geometric imperfection....................................................... 101
Table 6-3 Interstorey drift coefficient ......................................................................................... 103
Table 6-4 Damage limitation requirement .................................................................................. 105
Table 7-1 Effective depth calculation ......................................................................................... 108
Table 7-2 Summary design for flexure of beam on axis 2 .......................................................... 115
Table 7-3 summary shear design ................................................................................................ 120
Table 7-4 Centroid of the uncracked transformed section .......................................................... 123
Table 7-5 uncracked moment of inertia ..................................................................................... 123
Table 8-1 First order moment and axial force from ENVX for column 13 ............................... 137
Table 8-2 effective length and radius of gyration of c-13 .......................................................... 139
Table 8-6 slenderness ratio, slenderness limit and check for second order effect ...................... 141
Table 8-4 Design moment and moment accidental eccentricity ................................................. 143
Table 8-5 Area of longitudinal reinforcement ............................................................................ 145
Table 8-6 Number of bars for longitudinal reinforcement .......................................................... 145
Table 8-7 Summary lap length for column ................................................................................. 147

AAiT Page viii

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Plain and reinforcing concrete beams ........................................................................... 2
Figure 1-2 Normal frequency distribution of strengths .................................................................. 5
Figure 1-3 stress-strain curve for concrete under short term loading ............................................. 6
Figure 1-4 Relationship compressive strength of concrete and its age ........................................... 6
Figure 1-5 Idealized stress-strain distributions ............................................................................... 7
Figure 1-6 Parabolic-rectangular stress-strain diagram for concrete (fck ≤50 N/mm)..................... 8
Figure 1-7 Stress-strain diagram for hot rolled high yielding reinforcement bars .......................... 9
Figure 1-8 Idealized and design stress- strain diagram for reinforcement bars ............................ 10
Figure 1-9 Typical floor plan of the building ............................................................................... 11
Figure 2-1 Panels with their assigned name.................................................................................. 14
Figure 2-2 unadjusted span and support moment on the slab. ...................................................... 26
Figure 2-3 Unequal moments at adjacent panels .......................................................................... 27
Figure 2-4 Adjusted span and support moment on the slab .......................................................... 30
Figure 2-5 strips for shear design .................................................................................................. 35
Figure 2-6 Trapezoidal load distribution and its equivalent rectangular load distribution ........... 37
Figure 2-7 Un-factored dead load on C1 and C2 .......................................................................... 39
Figure 3-1 Staircase and its component ........................................................................................ 41
Figure 3-2 Straight stairs ............................................................................................................... 41
Figure 3-3 Quarter turn stair ......................................................................................................... 42
Figure 3-4 Half turn stair .............................................................................................................. 42
Figure 3-5 Bifurcated stairs .......................................................................................................... 43
Figure 3-6 Stair slab spanning longitudinally ............................................................................... 43
Figure 3-7 Slab supported between two stringer beams or walls ................................................. 44
Figure 3-8 Cantilever slabs from a spandrel beam or wall ........................................................... 44
Figure 3-9 Doubly cantilever slabs from a central beam .............................................................. 44
Figure 3-10 Resultant tensional force at the junction ................................................................... 45
Figure 3-11 Top and sectional view of staircase........................................................................... 46
Figure 3-12 Load transferred from staircase to beam from due to dead load. .............................. 57

AAiT Page ix
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Figure 3-13 Load transferred from stair to beam due to live load ................................................ 57
Figure 4-1 General for duo pitch roof when pitch angle is positive ............................................. 65
Figure 4-2 Zones for wind direction Ɵ = 0 ................................................................................... 65
Figure 4-3 Zones for wind direction Ɵ = 90 ................................................................................. 66
Figure 4-4 wind pressure on surfaces ........................................................................................... 69
Figure 4-5 Lattice purlin ............................................................................................................... 70
Figure 4-6 purlin sizing ................................................................................................................. 74
Figure 4-7 Standard RHS section ................................................................................................. 75
Figure 4-8 Vertical deflections to be considered .......................................................................... 76
Figure 4-9 General loading of roofing truss.................................................................................. 79
Figure 4-10 Sizing of the truss section.......................................................................................... 80
Figure 6-1Examples of geometric imperfection ......................................................................... 100
Figure 7-1 possible Strain diagram at Ultimate Limit State ES EN-1992-1.1:2015 Figure 6.1 . 107
Figure 7-2 Shear force and bending moment diagram for beam on axis 2 ................................. 109
Figure 7-3 T beams and inverted L beams .................................................................................. 110
Figure 7-4 Definition of l, for calculation of flange width ......................................................... 110
Figure 7-5 Effective flange width parameters ............................................................................ 111
Figure 7-6 Rectangular stress-strain block ................................................................................. 114
Figure 7-7 Principal stresses in beam ......................................................................................... 116
Figure 7-8 Truss model and notation for shear reinforced members .......................................... 117
Figure 7-9 Definition of crack width .......................................................................................... 120
Figure 7-10 Equivalent homogenous section .............................................................................. 122
Figure 7-11 Cracked section stress and strain distribution ......................................................... 125
Figure 7-12 Effective tension area .............................................................................................. 126
Figure 7-13 Anchorage bond ...................................................................................................... 128
Figure 7-14 Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for columns ...................................... 130
Figure 8-1 Tied columns (a) and spiral columns(b).................................................................... 132
Figure 8-2 (a) Braced columns (b) Unbraced columns ............................................................... 133
Figure 8-3 Examples of different buckling modes and corresponding effective ........................ 134
Figure 8-4 Moment and deformation of a braced isolated column ............................................. 142
Figure 8-5 Reinforced column section ........................................................................................ 144

AAiT Page x
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 1: Introduction
1.1 Background
Reinforced concrete is the most widely used construction material in the world in the construction
industry. It is a composite structure of construction material concrete and steel reinforcement bars.
It is a concrete with steel bars embedded in it. The universal nature of reinforced concrete
construction stems from the wide availability of reinforcing bars and the constituents of concrete
(gravel or crushed rock, sand, water, and cement), from the relatively simple skills required in
concrete construction, and from the economy of reinforced concrete compared with other forms of
construction. Plain concrete and reinforced concrete are used in buildings of all sorts, underground
structures, water tanks, wind turbine foundations and towers, offshore oil exploration and
production structures, dams and bridges.

1.2 Mechanics of Reinforced Concrete

Concrete is very strong in compression, but weak in tension. As a result, cracks develop whenever
loads, restrained shrinkage, or temperature changes give rise to tensile stresses in excess of the
tensile strength of the concrete. In the plain concrete beam shown in Figure 1-1b, the moments
about point o due to the applied loads are resisted by an internal tension-compression couple
involving tension in the concrete. An unreinforced beam fails very suddenly and completely when
the first crack forms. In a reinforced concrete beam Figure 1-1c, reinforcing bars are embedded in
such a way that the tension forces needed for moment equilibrium after the concrete cracks can be
developed in the bars. Thus, the idea of reinforcing concrete with steel results in a material having
the potential of resisting significant tensile stresses, which was hitherto impossible. Thus, the
construction of load bearing flexural members, such as beams and slabs, become viable with this
material (reinforced concrete). Its utility and versatility are achieved by combining the best
features of concrete and steel. It can be seen from the table below that concrete and steel are less
or more compatible.
Table 1-1 commentary properties of concrete and steel

Property Concrete Steel

Strength in tension Poor Good

Strength in compression Good Good, but slender bars will buckle

Strength in shear Fair Good

Durability Good Corrodes if unprotected

AAiT Page 1
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Fire resistance Good Poor, loses rapid loss of strength at high temperature

Figure 1-1 Plain and reinforcing concrete beams

The construction of reinforced concrete member involves building a form or mold in the shape of
the member being built. The form must be strong enough to support the weight and hydrostatic
pressure of the wet concrete, plus any forces applied to it by workers, concrete casting equipment,
wind, and so on. The reinforcement is places in the form and held in place during concreting
operation. After the concrete has reached sufficient strength, the forms can be removed.

1.3 Design Philosophies

Over the years, various design philosophies have evolved in different parts of the world, with
regard to reinforced concrete design. A ‘design philosophy, is built up on a few fundamental
premises, and is reflective of the way of thinking.
1. Working stress method
This was the traditional method of design not only for reinforced concrete, but also for
structural steel and timber design. The conceptual basis of WSM is simple. The method
basically assumes that the structure material behaves in a linear elastic manner, and that
adequate safety can be ensured by suitably restricting the stress in the material induced by the
expected ‘working loads’ on the structure. As the specified permissible (‘allowable’) stresses

AAiT Page 2
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
are kept well below the materials strength (i.e., the linear phase of the stress-strain curve), the
assumption of linear elastic behavior is considered justifiable.
2. Ultimate load method (ULM)
In this method, the stress condition at the state of impending collapse of the structure is
analyzed, and the non-linear stress-strain curves of concrete and steel are made use of. The
design stresses used are the ultimate strength of materials and for safety the loads are magnified
or scaled up by load factors, defined as the ratio of the ultimate load to working load. The
ultimate load method makes it possible for different types of loads to be assigned different load
factors under loading conditions, thereby overcoming the related shortcoming of WSM.
3. Limit states method (LSM)
Unlike WSM, which based calculations on service load conditions alone, and unlike ULM,
which based calculations on ultimate load condition alone, LSM aims for a comprehensive and
rational solution to the design problem, by considering safety at ultimate loads and
serviceability at working loads.
When a structure or structural element becomes unfit for its intended use, it is said to have
reached a limit state. The limit states for reinforced concrete structures can be divided into
three basic groups.
Ultimate limit state. This involves a structural collapse of part or all of the structure. Such
limit state should have a very low probability of occurrence, because it may lead to loss
of life and major financial losses. The major ultimate limit states are loss of equilibrium
of part or all of the structure as rigid body, rupture of critical parts of the structure,
progressive collapse, formation of plastic mechanism, instability due to deformations of
the structure, and fatigue.
Serviceability limit states. These involve disruption of the functional use of the structure,
but no collapse occurs. Because there is less danger of loss of life, a higher probability of
occurrence is generally tolerated than in case of an ultimate limit state. The major
serviceability limit states include excessive deformations, excessive crack widths, and
undesirable vibrations.
Special limit states. This class of limit states involve damage or failure due to abnormal
conditions or abnormal loadings and includes:
a) Damage or collapse in extreme earthquakes,
b) Structural effects of fire, explosions, or vehicular collisions,
c) Structural effects of corrosion or deterioration, and
d) Long term physical or chemical instability (normally not a problem with concrete
structures).
Among the three method of design, the limit state method of design (LSM) is the most widely used
method of design in many countries building code standard. Our structural building is based on

AAiT Page 3
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
this method of design according to the revised Ethiopian building code standard ES EN 1992:2015
adopted from the European building code standard except for typical flat slabs. Flat slab design in
ES EN 1992:2015) is based on American concrete institute (ACI).

1.4 Design criteria according to ES EN 1992:2015

To analyze and design a structure, it is necessary to establish criteria or requirements for
determining whether a given structure is acceptable for use in a specified circumstance or for use
directly as a design objective that must be met. ES EN 1990:2015 gives the following basic
requirements during design of reinforced concrete or any structure for that matter.
1. A structure shall be designed and executed un such a way that it will, during its intended life,
with appropriate degree of reliability and in economical way sustain all actions and influences
likely to occur during execution and use and remain fit for the use for which it is required (ES
EN 1990:2015 section 2.1(1)P).
2. A structure shall be designed to have adequate structural resistance, serviceability, and
durability (ES EN 1990:2015 section 2.1(2)P).
3. In the case of fire, the structural resistance shall be adequate for the required period of time
(ES EN 1990:2015 section 2.1(3)P).
4. A structure shall be designed and executed in such a way that it will not be damaged by events
such as explosion, impact, and the consequences of human errors, to an extent
disproportionate to the original cause (ES EN 1990:2015 section 2.1(4)P).
5. Potential damage shall be avoided or limited by appropriate choice of one or more of the
followings (ES EN 1990:2015 section 2.1(5)P):
• Avoiding, eliminating or reducing the hazards to which a structure can be subjected;
• Selecting a structural form which has low sensitivity to the hazards considered;
• Selecting a structural form and design that can survive adequately the accidental
removal of an individual or limited part of structure, or occurrence of acceptable
localized damage;
• Avoiding as far as possible structural systems that can collapse without warning;
• Tying the structural member together.
According to ES EN 1990:2015 section 2.1(6)P the basic design criteria or requirements listed
above should be met by the choice of suitable material, by appropriate design and detailing, and
by specifying control procedures for design, production, execution, and use relevant to particular
project.

AAiT Page 4
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
1.5 Design situations
Design situations are situations that take the circumstances under which the structure is required
to fulfill its function. According to ES EN 1990:2015 section 3.2 design situations are classified
as follows:
Persistence design situations, which refer to conditions of normal use;
Transient design situation, which refer to temporary conditions applicable to the structure,
e.g. during execution or repair;
Accidental situations, which refer to exceptional conditions applicable to the structure or
to its exposure, e.g. to fire, exposure, impact or the consequences of localized failure;
Seismic design situations, which refer conditions applicable to the structure when
subjected to seismic events.
According section 3.2 of ES EN 1990:2015, Design situations shall be sufficiently Sevier and
varied so as to encompass all conditions that can reasonably be foreseen to occur during the
execution and use of the structure.

1.6 Material
Two materials whose properties must be known are concrete and steel reinforcement. In case of
concrete, the property with which we are primarily concerned is its compressive strength. For steel,
however, it is its tensile strength capacity which is important.

1.6.1 Concrete

Figure 1-2 Normal frequency distribution of strengths

Concrete is a very variable material, having a wide range of strength and stress-strain curves. A
typical curve for concrete in compression is shown in Figure 1-3. As the load is applied, the ratio
between stressed and strains is approximately linear at first and the concrete behaves almost as an
elastic material with virtually full recovery of displacement if the load is removed. Eventually, the
curve is no longer linear and the concrete behaves more and more as plastic material. If the load

AAiT Page 5
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
were to be removed during the plastic range the recovery would no longer be complete and a
permanent deformation would remain. The ultimate strain for most structural concrete tends to be
a constant value approximately 0.0035, although this is likely to reduce for concretes with cube
strengths above about 50 N/mm2. ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 table 3.1 ‘design of concrete structures’
recommends values for ultimate strain in such case.

Figure 1-3 stress-strain curve for concrete under short term loading
Concrete generally increases its strength with age. This characteristic is illustrated by the graph in
Figure 1-4 which shows how the increase is rapid at first, becoming more gradual later. The precise
relationship will depend upon the type of the cement used. Some codes of practice allow the
concrete strength used in design to be varied according to the age of concrete when it supports the
design load. In ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 3.1.2 the strength of concrete is based on the
characteristic cylindrical strength fck determined at 28 days with a maximum value of Cmax
(C90/105).

Figure 1-4 Relationship compressive strength of concrete and its age

AAiT Page 6
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
1.6.1.1 Stress-strain curves for design of concrete cross-sections
For concrete, three possibilities are described in ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 3.1.7. The preferred
idealization is the parabolic- rectangular diagram, but a bi-linear diagram and a rectangular
diagram are also permitted.

Figure 1-5 Idealized stress-strain distributions

The design concrete strength, fcd is obtained by dividing the characteristic cylindrical strength, fck,
of concrete by the partial safety factor for concrete, γc. However, the design stress is obtained by
applying a reduction factor, αcc, to the design strength. This is given in ES EN 1992-1-1:2015
expression 3.15 as follows:
𝛼𝑐𝑐𝑓𝑐𝑘
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
𝛾𝑐

Where:

𝛾𝑐 Is the partial safety factor for concrete, and

𝛼𝑐𝑐 Is the coefficient taking account of long term effects on the compressive strength and of unfavorable
effects resulting from the way the load is applied (recommended value is 0.85).

The introduction of the factor, αcc, is not only related long-term effects on the compressive strength
and of unfavorable effects resulting from the way load is applied, but also it is related to the
idealization and design stress-strain diagram used for design of concrete.

AAiT Page 7
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 1-6 Parabolic-rectangular stress-strain diagram for concrete (fck ≤50 N/mm)
The value of design tensile strength, fctd, is defined in ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 expression 3.16 as
follows:
𝛼𝑐𝑡 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑘, 0.05
𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 =
𝛾𝑐
Where:

𝛾𝑐 Is the partial safety factor for concrete, and

𝛼𝑐𝑡 Is the coefficient taking account of long term effects on the tensile strength and of the unfavorable
effects, resulting from the way the load is applied.

Depending on the exposure class of concrete assumed (XC1, dry or permanently wet), form ES
EN 1992-1-1:2015, annex E, table E.1N, for the exposure class of concrete XC! The minimum
concrete grade of C20/25. But we have adopted a concrete grade of C25/30 for slabs, beams and
columns and C30/35 for the foundation for this project.
C25/30
0.85 ∗ 25
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
1.5
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 14.167 𝑀𝑃𝑎
1 ∗ 1.8
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑙𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 =
1.5
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑙𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔ℎ𝑡, 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 = 1.2𝑀𝑃𝑎
C30/35
0.85 ∗ 30
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑓𝑐𝑑 =
1.5

AAiT Page 8
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑓𝑐𝑑 = 17 𝑀𝑃𝑎
1∗2
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑙𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ, 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 =
1.5
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑡𝑒𝑛𝑠𝑖𝑙𝑒 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑔ℎ𝑡, 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 = 1.33𝑀𝑃𝑎

1.6.2 Reinforcing steel

As mentioned earlier in this chapter, because concrete is weak in tension, it is reinforced with steel
bars or wires that can resist the tensile stresses. The most common types of reinforcements for
nonprestressed members are hot rolled deformed bars. Figure 1-7 shows a typical stress-strain
curve for a hot rolled high yield steel (commonly used for reinforcement). Steel behaves as an
elastic material, with the strain proportional to the stress up to the yield, at which point there is
sudden increase in strain with no change in stress. After the yield point, this becomes a plastic
material and the strain increases rapidly up to the ultimate value.

Figure 1-7 Stress-strain diagram for hot rolled high yielding reinforcement bars
1.6.2.1 Stress-strain curves for design of reinforcement
For steel, the recommended idealized and design stress-strain diagrams are given in ES EN 1992-
1-1:2015 figure 3.8 as follows:

AAiT Page 9
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 1-8 Idealized and design stress- strain diagram for reinforcement bars
The design steel stresses, fyd, are derived from the idealized (characteristic) stress, fyk, by dividing
by the partial safety factor for steel, γs. This is given in ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 3.2.7 by
assuming either of the following:
a) An inclined top branch with a strain of εud (0.9 εuk) and maximum stress
of 𝑘𝑓𝑦𝑘/𝛾𝑠, the recommended value of 𝑘 = (𝑓𝑡⁄𝑓𝑦)𝑘.
b) A horizontal top branch without the need to check the strain limit, the design
𝑓𝑦𝑘⁄
stress should not exceed 𝛾𝑠.
In this project we have used the assumption given in B for simplicity and convenient. On our
project medium ductility S400 steel grade reinforcement have been adopted.
400
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑒𝑙 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠, 𝑓𝑦𝑑 = =347.83Mpa.
1.15

𝑀𝑜𝑑𝑢𝑙𝑢𝑠 𝑜𝑓 𝑒𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦, 𝐸𝑠 = 195𝑀𝑃𝑎

1.7 General description of the building

The building is a G+15 reinforced concrete frame structure located in Addis Ababa. The building
is composed of solid slab system to support the loads due to occupancy. Form the sectional
elevation view of the building, the stairs type is stairs with quarter-turn landing. The elevator shaft
is located at the middle of the stairs three flights.
The geometry of the roof is a duo pitch roof type. Wind load analysis is carried out for each cases
of wind direction and the worst-case scenario is considered for design. In addition, galvanized steel
sheet from the kality metal products factory manufacturing manual is used as a roof cover. For the
case of purlin, truss members eucalyptus members may be used since the loading is very small,
but for academic purpose to practice steel structures analysis and design we have used steel
members.

AAiT Page 10
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 1-9 Typical floor plan of the building

AAiT Page 11
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

AAiT Page 12
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 2: Slab Analysis and Design

2.1 Introduction
A reinforced concrete slab is a broad, flat plate, usually horizontal, with top and bottom surfaces
parallel or nearly so. It may be supported by reinforced beams (and is usually cast monolithically
with such beams), by masonry or reinforced concrete walls, by structural steel members, directly
by columns, or continuously by ground. Slabs may be supported on two opposite sides only in
which case the structural action of the slab is essentially one-way, the load being carried by the
slab in the direction perpendicular to the supporting beams. There may be beams in all the four
sides, so that two-way slab action is obtained. Intermediate beams may be provided if the ratio of
the length two width of the one panel is greater than two, most of the load is carried in the short
direction to the supporting beams and one-way action is obtained in effect even though the supports
are provided on all sides.
One-way slabs transfer the imposed loads in one direction only. They may be supported on two
opposite sides only in which the structural action is essentially one-way, the loads being carried in
direction perpendicular to the supporting beams or walls. But rectangular slabs often have such
proportions and supports (e.g., relatively deep, stiff monolithic concrete beams) that result in two-
way action at any point, such slabs are curved in both directions resulting in biaxial bending
moments. It is convenient to think of such slabs as consisting of two sets of parallel strips, in each
direction and intersecting each other. So part of the load is carried by one set and the remainder by
the other.

2.2 Design and Analysis of Solid Slab.

2.2.1 Type of slab
A slab subjected to dominantly uniformly distributed loads may be considered to be one-way
spanning if either:
• It possesses two free (unsupported) and sensibly parallel edges, or
• It is the central part of a sensibly rectangular slab supported on four edges
with a ratio of the longer to shorter span greater than 2.(ES EN 1992-1-
1:2015,section 5.3(5))
The first step in the design of floor slab is classifying the slab whether it is one way or two-way
slab by determining the Ly/Lx.
Where

Ly Is the longer dimension of the panel, and

Lx Is the smaller dimension of the panel

AAiT Page 13
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
If Ly/Lx≤2………. two-way slab
If Ly/Lx >2………one way slab.

Figure 2-1 Panels with their assigned name

Table 2-1 Determination of type of slab

panel Ly(m) Lx(m) Ly/Lx Type of slab

P1 5.55 4.65 1.473 Two-way
P2 5.55 5.53 1.4 Two-way
P3 5.55 5.53 1.56 Two-way
P4 5.53 3.65 1.56 Two-way
P5 5.53 3.65 1.323 Two-way
P6 4.45 3.65 1.323 Two-way
P7 3.65 3.2 1.47 Two-way

AAiT Page 14
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
C1 18.71 1.75 10.7 One-way
C2 18.71 1.75 10.7 One-way
C3 9.15 1.75 5.23 One-way

The cantilever parts of the slab are one way and they are analyzed as one-way slab by taking one-
meter width, and the two-way slabs are analyzed using coefficient method.

2.2.2 Design for cover

The recommended procedure for determination of the minimum concrete cover is given by
ES EN 1992:2015 section 4 Expression (4.2).
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑏𝑜𝑛𝑑
Cmin=max{ 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑑𝑢𝑟 + ∆𝑐𝑑𝑢𝑟 − ∆𝑐𝑑𝑢𝑐, 𝑠𝑡 − ∆𝑐𝑑𝑢𝑟, 𝑎𝑑𝑑
10𝑚𝑚
Where

Cmin,bond is the minimum cover due to the cover requirement,

Cmin,dur is minimum cover due to environmental conditions,

∆c,dur is additive safety element,

∆cdur,st is the reduction of minimum cover for the use of stainless steel, and

∆cdur,add is the reduction of minimum cover additional protection

We have used
∆c,dur=0 … ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 4.4.1.2(6),(since we don’t have additional safety
elements).
∆c,duct,st=0….. ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 4.4.1.2(7), (since the type of reinforcement that we
have used is not stainless steel).
∆cdur, add =0…ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 4.4.1.2(7), (since we have not used additional
protection).

AAiT Page 15
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑏𝑜𝑛𝑑
Cmin = max{ 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑑𝑢𝑟
10𝑚𝑚
In order to transmit bond forces safely and to ensure adequate compaction the minimum cover
should not be less than Cmin,bond.
According to ES EN-1992-1-1:2015, Table 4.2 the value of Cmin,bond for ordinary bond requirement
should be equals with the bar diameter.
N.B. if the nominal aggregate size is greater than 32mm, the value of Cmin,bond should be increased
by 5mm.
The minimum cover required for bond is given by ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, Table 4.2.
Cmin,bond=bar diameter
Cmin,dur is the minimum cover value for reinforcement in normal weight concrete take account of
the exposure classes and the structural classes. We are going to design our building
• Design service life of 50 years.
• Normal quality control
• Maximum aggregate size of 20mm
• 1HR fire protection
We have chosen an exposure class of XC1 which is for dry environment…….ES EN 1992-1-
1:2015 Table 4.1.
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, section 4.4.1.2(5) NOTE, the recommended structural class
for service life of 50 years is 4. And the concrete compressive strengths are given ES EN 1991-1-
1:2015, Annex E.
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, Annex E, Table E.1N, for exposure class of XC1 take a
minimum concrete grade of C-20/25. So, we have used a concrete grade of C-25/30. The
diameter of reinforcement bar that we are going to use for the slab is 8mm.
Cover for bond and durability

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, Table 4.4N for structural class of four and exposure class of
xc1 the minimum cover for durability is 15mm.
The type of steel on our slab system is ordinary, therefore the minimum cover for bond should be
determined from ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 Table 4.2 which is equals with the bar diameter which is
8mm.
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑏 = 𝐵𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 (𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑖𝑚𝑢𝑚 𝑎𝑔𝑔𝑟𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑒 𝑠𝑖𝑧𝑒 𝑖𝑠 𝑙𝑒𝑠𝑠 𝑡ℎ𝑎𝑛 32𝑚𝑚)
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑏 = 8𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 16
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
8𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = max{ 15𝑚𝑚
10𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 15𝑚𝑚
The nominal cover should be computed according to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, Expression 4.1 by
adding the minimum cover for bond and durability (Cmin) and the allowance in design for deviation
(∆c,dev).
𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 𝑐𝑚𝑖𝑛 + ∆𝑐𝑑𝑒𝑣
The required minimum cover shall be increased by the accepted negative deviation given in the
standard for execution by the amount of ∆c, dev. The recommended value for allowance in design
for deviation is 10mm. Where fabrication is subjected to quality assurance system, in which the
monitoring includes measurement of the concrete cover, the allowance in design for deviation may
be reduced.
10mm≥∆c,dev≥5mm.
Where it can be assured that a very accurate measurement device is used for monitoring and non-
confirming members are rejected the allowance in design for deviation, ∆c,dev may be reduced.
10mm≥∆c,dev≥0mm.
For our case we are going to use the allowance in design deviation to be 10mm which is given by
ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, section 4.4.13(1)P because we don’t have accurate measurement devices
and quality assurance system.
∆𝑐, 𝑑𝑒𝑣 = 10𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 𝑐𝑚𝑖𝑛 + ∆𝑐, 𝑑𝑒𝑣
𝑐𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 15𝑚𝑚 + 10𝑚𝑚
𝑐𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚
Cover for 1 HR fire protection

Where mechanical resistance in the case of fire is required, concrete structures shall be designed
and constructed in such a way that they maintain their load bearing function during the relevant
fire exposure. (ES EN-1992-1-2:2015 section 2.1.1).
For REI=60, Dmin=80mm<D=170mm (for the two-way slab) …. Ok! … ES EN 1992-1-2:2015,
Table 5.8.
𝑎𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 10𝑚𝑚 < 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚
For REI=60, Dmin=80mm<D=210mm (for the cantilever parts). Ok! … ES EN 1992-1-2:2015,
Table 5.8.
𝑎𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 10𝑚𝑚 < 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 17
 Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Therefore, use a concrete cover of 25mm for the slab.

2.2.3 Slab Depth Determination (Deflection requirement)

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 7.4 the minimum depth of the slab should satisfy for
the serviceability requirement.
The deformation of a member or structure shall not be such that it adversely affects its proper
functioning or appearance. Reinforced concrete beams or slabs in buildings are dimensioned so
that they comply with the limits of span to depth ratio. Their deflections may be considered as not
exceeding the limits set out in deflections that could damage adjacent parts of the structure should
be limited for the deflection after construction span/500 is normally an appropriate limit for quasi-
permanent loads. Other limits may be considered, depending on the sensitivity of adjacent parts.
The appearance and general utility of the structure may be impaired when the calculated sag of a
beam, slab or cantilever subjected to quasi-permanent loads exceeds span/250. The sag is assessed
relative to the supports. Pre-camber may be used to compensate for some or all of the deflection
but any upward deflection incorporated in the formwork should not generally exceed span/250.
The limit state of deformation may be checked by either:
• by limiting the span/depth ratio, according to the equations shown below
• by comparing a calculated deflection with a limit value
The actual deformations may differ from the estimated values, particularly if the values of applied
moments are close to the cracking moment. The differences will depend on the dispersion of the
material properties, on the environmental conditions, on the load history, on the restraints at the
supports, ground conditions, etc.
We have used the limited span to depth ratio according to equation 1 or 2 shown below the limiting
span/depth ratio may be estimated using Expressions 1 and 2(ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 7.4.2)
below and multiplying this by correction factors to allow for the type of reinforcement used and
other variables. And it is given by ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 expression (7.16a).
3
𝑙 𝜌𝑜
= 𝑘 [11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ + 3.2√𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ ( 𝜌𝑜 − 1)2] 𝑖𝑓 𝜌 ≤ 𝜌𝑜
𝑑 𝜌 𝜌

1
𝑙 𝜌𝑜 1 𝜌′2
= 𝑘 [11 + 1.5√𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ + √𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ ( ) ] . 𝑖𝑓 𝜌 > 𝜌𝑜
𝑑 𝜌−𝜌′ 12 𝜌𝑜

Where:

l/d Is the limit span/depth;

K Is the factor to take into account the different structural systems;

AAiT Page 18
 Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
ρ0 Is the reference reinforcement ratio = √fck ∗ 10−3;

ρ Is the required tension reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to the design loads (at
support for cantilevers);

ρ´ Is the required compression reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment due to design loads (at
support for cantilevers); and

fck Is cylindrical characteristics compressive strength of the concrete in MPa units.

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 7.4.2, table 7.4N, the recommended values of k is

given according to the structural system and the value of ρ for concrete slightly stressed is 0.5%.
The reference reinforcement ratio (ρo) for cylindrical characteristics concrete strength of 25Mpa
(c-20/25) is

ρo=√25 ∗ 10−3 = 5𝑥10−3

ρo=0.5%...............ρ=ρ0, therefore use Expression (7.16a) of ES EN 1992-1-1:2015
3
𝑙 0.5% 2
= 𝑘 [11 + 1.5√23 ∗ + 3.2√25 ∗ ( 0.5% − 1) ]
𝑑 0.5% 0.5%

𝑙⁄ = 𝑘[11 + 1.5 ∗ 5] =18.5k

𝑑
Since we are using a reinforcement bar with a characteristic yield strength of 400Mpa
(fyk=400Mpa), the span to depth ratio should be multiplied according ES EN 1992-1-1:2015by a
factor 500/400.
𝑙⁄ = 18.5𝑘 ∗ (500) =23.124k
𝑑 400
1
𝑑=
23.125𝑘

Table 2-2 Effective depth of the slab with their respective panels

Slab Structural system K Span length(m) d(cm)

Panel1 End span 1.3 4.65 12.5
Panel2 End span 1.3 5.53 9.4

Panel3 End span 1.3 5.53 12.5

Panel4 End span 1.3 3.65 12.5

AAiT Page 19
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Panel5 End span 1.3 3.65 12.5

Panel6 End span 1.3 3.65 13.57

Panel 7 End span 1.3 3.2

C1 Cantilever 0.4 1.75 17.8

C2 Cantilever 0.4 1.75 17.8

C3 Cantilever 0.4 1.75 17.8

According to the above calculation the governing effective depth for the panels is 137.5mm,
whereas for the cantilever slab the governing effective depth is 178mm.
𝑆𝑙𝑎𝑏 𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑡ℎ 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑡𝑤𝑜 𝑤𝑎𝑦 𝑝𝑎𝑛𝑒𝑙𝑠 = 𝑑 + (𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟)/2 + 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
𝐷 = 135.7𝑚𝑚 + 8𝑚𝑚/2 + 25𝑚𝑚
𝐷 = 164.7𝑚𝑚 ≈ 170𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑙𝑎𝑏 𝑑𝑒𝑝𝑡ℎ 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑐𝑎𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑣𝑒𝑟 = 𝑑 + (𝑏𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟)/2 + 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑟𝑒𝑡𝑒 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
𝐷 = 178𝑚𝑚 + 8𝑚𝑚/2 + 25𝑚𝑚
𝐷 = 207𝑚𝑚 ≈ 210𝑚𝑚

2.2.4 Slab Load Determination

Loads on slabs are both permanent loads and imposed loads. The permanent loads are loads that
arise from the self-weight of the slab, cement screed, floor finishing material, plastering and
ceiling, partition walls and partition wall finishing materials. The imposed loads are determined
based on the functional use of the building and it accounts for loads that do, or can, change over
time, such as people walking around the building (occupancy) or movable objects such as
furniture. Imposed loads are variable as they depend on usage and capacity. However, design code
ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 can provide equivalent loads for various structures based on their functional
use.
1. Permanent load (sample calculation for panel 1)

Partition loads are wall loads that are on top of the slab and they are calculated for their thickness
of the wall and their finishing material as follows;
Partition wall weight = tw * L * H * HCB + tp * L * H * pL

Where:

AAiT Page 20
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

tw Thickness of the partition wall(m);

L Total length of the partition wall(m);

H Height of the partition wall(m);

 HCB Unit weight of hallow concrete block (HCB) in KN/m3;

tp Thickness of the plastering material(m); and

 pL Unit weight of the plastering material in KN/m3.

On panel 1 of the slab system we have a thickness of 2cm plastering on both sides of the wall and
8.5m long 15cm thick partition wall. The unit weight of the HCB walls and the plastering material
(cement screed) is 14 KN/m3 and 17 KN/m3 respectively. Then the weight of the partition wall on
panel on is calculated as:
KN KN
Partition wall weight on panel 1 = 8.5m*3.03m*0.15m*14 + 8.5m*3.03m*0.02m*2*17
m3 m3

Partition wall weight on panel 1= 71.6KN

Partition wall weight on panel 1 per m2 of slab = 3 KN/m2
Table 2-3 Sample dead load calculation on panel 1
kN kN
Material Unit weight ( ) Thickness (m) Load ( )
m3 m2

Ceramic finishing 23 0.01 0.23

Cement screed 23 0.03 0.69
Self-weight 25 0.17 4.25
Gypsum plastering 17 0.02 0.34
Partition wall Already calculated above 3
Total load 8.51
For the rest of the panels and cantilevers of the permanent load calculation process is the same as
the process for pane 1 of the slab system. The permanent loads for the rest of the panels and
cantilever slab is summarized on the table below.
Table 2-4 summery calculation of dead loads on slabs
KN
Panel Dead load ( )
m2

1 8.51
2 7.47

AAiT Page 21
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
3 7.67
4 6.72
5 7.107
6 5.365
7 6.234
C1 6.365
C2 6.51
C3 6.51

2. Imposed load

According to ES EN 1991-1-1:2015 section 6.1.2 for the determination of the imposed loads, floor
and roof areas in buildings should be sub-divided into categories according to their functional use.
Our building is residential G+10 building. Hence Areas for domestic and residential activities for
example Rooms in residential buildings and houses; bedrooms and wards in hospitals; bedrooms
in hotels and hostels kitchens and toilets are classified under category A according ES EN 1991-
1-1:2015 table 6.1.
The categories of loaded areas, as specified in Table 6.1, shall be designed by using characteristic
values qk (uniformly distributed load) and Qk (concentrated load). Where qk is intended for
determination of general effects and Qk for local effects. According to ES EN 1991-1-1:2015 table
6.2 Imposed loads on floors, balconies and stairs in buildings for category A is as shown on the
table below
Table 2-5 imposed loads under category A building
KN
Load area qk( ) Qk(KN)
m2
Floor 1.5-2.0 2.0-3.0
Stair 2.0-4.0 2.0-4.0
Balconies 2.5-4.0 2.0-3.0
From the table above we took imposed load of 2 KN/m2 for the slab system.
3. Design loads

After obtaining the permanent and imposed loads, the design loads are calculated based on ES EN
1990:2015 Annex A1 (normative) – application for buildings. Based on ES EN 1990:2015 Annex
A1.3 (ultimate limit states) – design values of actions in persistent and transient design situations

AAiT Page 22
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
indicates that “the design of structural members (STR - defined as Internal failure or excessive
deformation of the structure or structural members, including footings, piles, basement walls, etc.,
where the strength of construction materials of the structure governs (on ES EN 1990:2015 section
6.4.1(B))) not involving geotechnical actions should be verified using the design values of actions
from table A1.2(B)”. Therefore, the design action is given by:
𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘 + 1.5𝑄𝑘
Where:

𝐺𝑘 Is permanent load in KN/m2, and

𝑄𝑘 Is imposed load KN/m2.

Table 2-6 summery calculation of design loads on slabs

Panel Permanent load (Gk) Imposed load (Qk) Design load (Ed)
1 8.51 2 14.48
2 7.47 2 13.08
3 7.67 2 13.35
4 6.72 2 12.07
5 7.101 2 12.6
6 5.365 2 10.24
7 6.234 2 12.468
C1 6.365 2 12.7
C2 6.51 2 13.02
C3 6.51 2 13.02

2.2.5 Analysis of two-way Slabs

The precise determination of moments in two-way slabs with various conditions of continuity at
the supported edges is mathematically formidable and not suited for design. Various simplified
methods have been adopted for determining moments, shear and reactions. The methods that are
accepted because of satisfying equilibrium conditions are:
1. Coefficient method of analysis

2. Yield line method of analysis

AAiT Page 23
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
3. Strip method of analysis

2.2.5.1 Analysis of two-way slab using coefficient method

From the above methods the most widely used and the easiest method of analysis is the coefficient
method of analysis. This method of analysis is an elastic method of analysis that uses table moment
coefficient based on the support edge condition to determine the maximum design moments that
apply only to the middle strips and no redistribution is to be made. In slabs where the corners are
prevented from lifting, and provision for torsion is made, the maximum design moments per unit
width are given by the following equations.

Mx =  x *Wd *lx2

My =  y *Wd *lx2

Where:

Mx and My Bending moments in the x and y direction of slab,

 x and  y Moment coefficient based on supported edge conditions,

Wd Design load on the slab (KN/m2), and

lx Length of the shorter span (m).

Sample calculation for panel 1 (support moment)

Msx =  sx *Wd *lx2 = 0.08412*14.48*3.762 = 17.22 KNm

Msy =  sy *Wd *lx2 = 0.045*14.48*3.762 = 9.21 KNm

Sample calculation for panel 1 (span moment)

Mfx =  fx *Wd *lx2 = 0.063*14.48*3.762 = 12.9 KNm

Mfy =  fy *Wd *lx 2 = 0.034*14.48*3.762 = 6.96 KNm

Table 2-7 summery calculation of unadjusted span and support bending moments

Panel ly / lx  sx  fx  sy  fy Wd Msx Mfx Msy Mfy

1 1.473 0.0841 0.063 0.045 0.034 14.48 17.22 12.9 9.21 6.96
2 1.4 0.0588 0.0433 0.037 0.028 13.08 12.8 9.43 14.6 6.1
3 1.56 0.0841 0.063 0.045 0.034 13.35 15.88 11.89 8.5 6.42
4 1.56 0.0805 0.0605 0.045 0.034 12.07 13.74 10.32 7.65 5.8
5 1.323 0.0562 0.0418 0.037 0.0208 12.6 11.79 8.77 7.76 5.8

AAiT Page 24
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
6 1.323 0.0805 0.0605 0.045 0.034 10.24 11.66 8.76 6.5 4.3
7 1.47

2.2.5.2 Analysis of cantilever sabs

Cantilever slabs are slabs supported only on one side of the four side of the slab. They are analyzed
as one way slabs by taking 1m wide strip of cantilever beam. The design load of the partition load
at the edge of the slab can be computed using the following formula.
Pd = 1.35(HHCB *tHCB *b)* HCB

Where:

Pd Design wall load at the edge of cantilever slab (KN),

HHCB Height of the wall (m),

tHCB Thickness of the wall (m),

b Width of the strip 1m, and

 HCB Unit weight of hallow concrete block (HCB) in KN/m3.

Sample calculation for cantilever 1 (C1)

Pd =1.35(0.45m*0.2*1) *14
Pd =1.7 KN
Bending moment = 1.7*1.65 + 12.73*1.65*1.65*0.5
Bending moment = 20.133 KNm
Table 2-8 summery bending moment calculation for cantilever slabs

Panel Bending moment (KN/m)

C1 20.133
C2 20.53
C3 20.53

AAiT Page 25
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 2-2 unadjusted span and support moment on the slab.

2.2.6 Restrained slab with unequal conditions at adjacent panels

Bending moment at a common support, obtained by corresponding the two adjacent panels in
isolation may differ significantly, because of differing edge condition at far supports or differing
span length or loading.

AAiT Page 26
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 2-3 Unequal moments at adjacent panels

Obtain support moment for the adjacent panels, treating M-1 and M-2 as fixed end moments, the
moments may be distributed in proportion to the stiffness of span lx in each adjacent panels thus
revised bending moments M-B’ may be obtained for the support over B.
The span moment in each adjacent panels should be calculated
,
𝑀+1 = (𝑀1 + 𝑀+1) − 𝑀−𝐵
𝑀 = (𝑀2 + 𝑀−2 + 𝑀+2) − 𝑀,
,
− 𝑀−2
+2 −𝐵

Moment Adjustment is required when ∆M>10%. Unless we should take the average and distribute
it.
On axis “B”
(17.22−12.8) (13.74−8.77)
∆𝑀 = *100% =25.66% and ∆𝑀 = ∗ 100% =36.17%
17.22 13.74

On axis “C”
(15.88−12.8) (8.77−8.76)
∆𝑀 = ∗ 100%=19.4%, and ∆𝑀 = ∗ 100% =0.11%
15.88 8.77

On axis “2”
Between axis “A” and “B”
(9.42−7.68)
∆𝑀 = ∗ 100% =22.6%
9.42

Between axis “B” and “C”

(14.6−7.76)
∆𝑀 = ∗ 100% = 46.8%
14.6

Between axis “C” and “D”

(8.5−6.51)
∆𝑀 = ∗ 100% = 23.41%
8.5

Moment adjustment on axis “B” between axis “2” and “3”

1 1
• 𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠(𝑘𝑖) = 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠(𝑘𝑗) =
𝑙𝑖 𝑙𝑗

AAiT Page 27
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝐾𝑖
• 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟(𝐷𝐹𝑖) = 𝑎𝑛𝑑
𝐾𝑖+𝐾𝑗

• 𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟(𝐷𝐹𝑗) = 𝐾𝑗/(𝐾𝑖 + 𝐾𝑗)

Table 2-9 Adjusted support moment on axis ‘B’

Length(m) 3.76 4.08

Stiffness(K) 1/5.53 1/4.45

Distribution factor (Df) 0.52 0.48

Support moment (M) 17.22 12.8

change in support 4.42

moment(∆M)

Df*∆M -2.3 2.12

M+Df*∆M 14.92 14.92

Adjusted span moment between axis “2” and “3”

𝑀1 = (12.9 + 17.22) − 14.92 = 15.2𝐾𝑁𝑚.
𝑀2 = (9.43 + 12.8) − 14.92 = 7.31𝐾𝑁𝑚.
Table 2-10 Moment adjustment on axis “C” between axis “2” and “3”

Length(m) 4.08 3.76

Stiffness(k) 1/4.45 1/3.65
Distribution factor (Df) 0.48 0.52
Support moment (M) 12.8 15.88
change in support 3.08
moment(∆M)
Df*∆M -2.3 2.12
M+Df*∆M 14.92 14.92
Adjusted span moment between axis “2” and “3”
𝑀1 = (7.31 + 12.8) − 14.28 = 5.83𝐾𝑁𝑚.
𝑀2 = (11.89 + 15.88) − 14.28 = 13.49𝐾𝑁𝑚.
By following the same procedure, we have computed the adjusted support and span moment. And
the results are tabulated as shown below.

AAiT Page 28
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 2-11 Adjusted support moment

Axis Adjusted support moment in KNm

On axis “B” between axis “1” and “2” 11.16
On axis “C” between axis “1” and “2” 8.77
On axis “2” between axis “A” and “B” 8.59
On axis “2” between axis “B” and “C” 11.32
On axis “2” between axis “C” and “D” 7.55

Table 2-12 Adjusted span moment

Axis M1(KNm) M2(KNm)

On axis “B” between axis “1” and “2” 12.9 9.4
On axis “C” between axis “1” and “2” 9.4 10.66
On axis “2” between axis “A” and “B” 7.79 4.89
On axis “2” between axis “B” and “C” 9.38 2.31
On axis “2” between axis “C” and “D” 7.37 3.88
Where M1 and M2 stands for the span moments on the left and right of the support respectively.

AAiT Page 29
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 2-4 Adjusted span and support moment on the slab.

2.2.7 Flexural Reinforcement Design of the Slab

The total depth of the slab for the two-way panels and for the cantilever part of the slab is 170mm
and 210mm respectively. From this the effective depth of the slab, which is the depth measured
from the compression face of the slab to the center of the reinforcement on the tension side of the
slab can be calculated as follows:
𝜙
𝑑𝑥 = 𝐷 − − 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
2
𝜙
𝑑𝑦 = 𝐷 − 𝜙 − − 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟
2

AAiT Page 30
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where

D is total depth of the slab,

dx is the effective depth of main reinforcement
dy is the effective depth of transverse reinforcement, and
Φ is bar diameter.
The nominal concrete cover is 25mm, a reinforcement bar having 8mm is used.
The effective depth for the two-way panels will be:
8𝑚𝑚
𝑑𝑥 = 170𝑚𝑚 − − 25𝑚𝑚=141mm
2
8𝑚𝑚
𝑑𝑦 = 170 − 8𝑚𝑚 − − 25𝑚𝑚 = 133mm
2

The effective depth for the cantilever parts of the slabs will be:
8𝑚𝑚
𝑑𝑥 = 210𝑚𝑚 − − 25𝑚𝑚 =181mm
2
8𝑚𝑚
𝑑𝑦 = 210𝑚𝑚 − 8𝑚𝑚 − − 25𝑚𝑚 = 173mm
2

2.2.7.1 Main reinforcement flexural design

Msd =15.2KNm
dx =141mm
μsd = Msd/(fcd ∗ b ∗ d2).
Where

Msd Is the design bending moment,

fcd Is the design compressive strength of concrete,
b Is width ( for slab 1m width is taken), and
D Is effective depth of the slab.

𝜇𝑠𝑑 = (15.2 ∗ 10^6Nmm)/(14.167N/mm2 ∗ 1000mm ∗ (141mm)2).

𝜇𝑠𝑑=0.054
Kz=0.969 …………...ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, Table 2.2
Msd
Ast1 = .
fyd∗Z

AAiT Page 31
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where

fyd Is the design tensile strength of reinforcement bar,

Z Is the moment arm which is the product of Kz and d, and
As Is the area of reinforcement bar on the tension side.
6 𝑁
𝐴𝑠 = 15.2 ∗ 10 ∗ 𝑁𝑚𝑚/(347.83 𝑚𝑚2 ∗ 0.969 ∗ 141𝑚𝑚)= 319 .84mm2

The area of the reinforcement should not be taken less than the minimum area of reinforcement
given by ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, Expression 9.1N in order to control shrinkage, and cracking. And
should not be taken greater than the maximum area of reinforcement provided by the code because
if it is greater than the maximum value the ductility will be altered, and there will be congestion
of reinforcement bar.
0.26∗𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚∗𝑏𝑡∗𝑑
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑘
0.0013𝑏𝑡 ∗ 𝑑
Where

bt Is the mean width of the tension zone, and

fctm Is mean value of axial tensile strength of concrete.

The value of fctm according to EN-1992-1-1, Table 3.1 for characteristic tensile strength of C-25/30
is 2.6Mpa.
𝑁
0.26 ∗ 2.6 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 141𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚2 = 238.29𝑚𝑚2
𝑁
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 400
𝑚𝑚2
{ 0.0013 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 141𝑚𝑚 = 183.3𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 238.29𝑚𝑚2 < 𝐴𝑠𝑡1 = 319.84𝑚𝑚2
The maximum area of reinforcement should be determined according to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015
section 9.2.1.1(3).
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04𝐴𝐶 , where Ac is the area of concrete.
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04 ∗ 170𝑚𝑚 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6800𝑚𝑚2 ……………...for the two-way panels
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04 ∗ 210𝑚𝑚 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 8400𝑚𝑚2 ………………for the cantilever part of the slab.

AAiT Page 32
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
The minimum area of reinforcement is less than the actual area of reinforcement and the maximum
area of reinforcement bar is greater than the actual area of reinforcement. Therefore, take
𝐴𝑠𝑡, 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 319.84𝑚𝑚2
𝑠 𝑎 ∗𝑏
𝑆 = 𝐴𝑆𝑡,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑
Where

S Is the spacing of the reinforcement bars,

as Is the area of single reinforcement bar, and
Ast, Is the area of the provided reinforcement bar.
(8𝑚𝑚)2
𝑆 = ((𝜋 ∗ ) ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚)/319.84𝑚𝑚 2
4

S= 157.16mm, take S,provided=150mm

The spacing of the reinforcement bar should not exceed the maximum spacing (Smax) given ES EN
1992-1-1:2015 section 9.3.1(5)..
3ℎ
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 {
40𝑚𝑚
h is the total depth of the slab
3 ∗ 170𝑚𝑚 = 510𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 400𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 400𝑚𝑚
𝑆, 𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 150𝑚𝑚 < 𝑆, 𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 400𝑚𝑚
Since the provided spacing of the reinforcement bars is less than the maximum value of the spacing
take the spacing of the reinforcement bars to be 150mm.
Following the same procedure, the area of the reinforcement and the spacing of the reinforcement
bars can be computed as shown in the table below.

AAiT Page 33
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 2-13 summery of flexural design of panels
Msd(KNm) Fcd(Mpa) Fyd(Mpa) b(mm) d(mm) μsd Kz z(mm) As(mm2) Asmin(mm2) Ast(mm2) S(mm) Smax(mm) Sprovide(mm) Sprovide(mm)
15.2 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0540 0.969 136.63 319.84 238.29 319.84 157.16 400.00 157.16 Ø8C/C150
5.83 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0207 0.984 138.74 120.81 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C 210
13.49 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0479 0.971 136.91 283.27 238.29 283.27 177.44 400.00 177.44 Ø8C/C 170
12.9 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0458 0.972 137.05 270.61 238.29 270.61 185.75 400.00 185.75 Ø8C/C 180
9.4 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0334 0.978 137.90 195.98 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C 210
10.66 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0378 0.976 137.62 222.70 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C 210
7.79 14.167 347.83 1000 133 0.0311 0.979 130.21 172.00 224.77 224.77 223.63 400.00 223.63 Ø8C/C220
9.38 14.167 347.83 1000 133 0.0374 0.976 129.81 207.75 224.77 224.77 223.63 400.00 223.63 Ø8C/C220
7.37 14.167 347.83 1000 133 0.0294 0.98 130.34 162.56 224.77 224.77 223.63 400.00 223.63 Ø8C/C220
4.89 14.167 347.83 1000 133 0.0195 0.977 129.94 108.19 224.77 224.77 223.63 400.00 223.63 Ø8C/C220
2.31 14.167 347.83 1000 133 0.0092 0.99 131.67 50.44 224.77 224.77 223.63 400.00 223.63 Ø8C/C220
3.88 14.167 347.83 1000 133 0.0155 0.989 131.54 84.80 224.77 224.77 223.63 400.00 223.63 Ø8C/C220
20.14 14.167 347.83 1000 181 0.0434 0.977 176.84 327.43 305.89 327.43 153.51 400.00 153.51 Ø8C/C150
20.53 14.167 347.83 1000 181 0.0442 0.976 176.66 334.11 305.89 334.11 150.44 400.00 150.44 Ø8C/C150
20.53 14.167 347.83 1000 181 0.0442 0.977 176.84 333.77 305.89 333.77 150.60 400.00 150.60 Ø8C/C150
20.14 14.167 347.83 1000 181 0.0434 0.977 176.84 327.43 305.89 327.43 153.51 400.00 153.51 Ø8C/C150
6.08 14.167 347.83 1000 181 0.0131 0.99 179.19 97.55 305.89 305.89 164.32 400.00 164.32 Ø8C/C160
14.92 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0530 0.969 136.63 313.95 238.29 313.95 160.11 400.00 160.11 Ø8C/C160
14.28 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0507 0.97 136.77 300.17 238.29 300.17 167.45 400.00 167.45 Ø8C/C160
8.59 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0305 0.98 138.18 178.72 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C210
11.32 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0402 0.976 137.62 236.49 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C210
7.55 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0268 0.981 138.32 156.92 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C210
11.61 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0412 0.972 137.052 243.545 238.29 243.55 206.39 400.00 206.39 Ø8C/C200
8.77 14.167 347.83 1000 141 0.0311 0.979 138.039 182.655 238.29 238.29 210.94 400.00 210.94 Ø8C/C210

2.2.8 Design for Shear

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 9.3.2(1) a slab in which shear reinforcement is
provided should have a depth of at least 200mm. since the depth of the two-way panels in our slab
system is less than 200mm which is 170mm. Therefore, no provision of shear reinforcement is
required.
For the cantilever parts of the slab the slab with a depth of 210mm the provision of shear
reinforcement should may be required.

AAiT Page 34
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 2-5 strips for shear design

𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 𝑤(0.5𝑙𝑛𝑥 − 𝑑) ∗ 𝑏w
Where

VEd Is the shear force,

bw Is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area(m),

lnx Is the smaller clear span length,

D Is effective depth, and

W Is the areal distributed design load over the slab.
The design shear resistance of concrete without shear reinforcement VRd, c , should be determined
using ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 expression (6.2a) or ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 expression (6.2b)
respectively.
1
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = (𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 ∗ 𝑘(100 ∗ 𝜌 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘)3 + (𝑘1𝜎𝑐𝑝))𝑏𝑤𝑑 or 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = (𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + (𝑘1𝜎𝑐𝑝))𝑏𝑤𝑑
1

𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {(𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 ∗ 𝑘(100 ∗ 𝜌𝑙 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘)3 + (𝑘1𝜎𝑐𝑝))𝑏𝑤𝑑

(𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 + (𝑘1𝜎𝑐𝑝))𝑏𝑤𝑑
3 1

𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘 ………ES EN-1992-1-1:2015 (1) Note.

2 2

AAiT Page 35
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where

𝜌𝑙 Is the flexural reinforcement ratio,

𝜌𝑙 = 𝐴𝑠𝑙/𝑏𝑤𝑑 ≤ 0.02 ……….. ………………….. ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 (1)

σcp Is ratio of axial load to area of the concrete,

𝑁𝐸𝑑/𝐴𝑐
𝜎 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 ………………………….. ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 (1)
𝑐𝑝 {
0.2𝑓𝑐𝑑
NEd is the axial force in the cross-section due to loading or pre-stressing in newton’s (NEd>0
for compression).

Ac Is the area of concrete cross section (mm2),

Asl Is the area of the tensile reinforcement, and

bw Is the smallest width of the cross-section in the tensile area (mm).

200
𝑘=1+√ 𝑑 ≤ 2.0 d in mm……………………………… ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 (1)
.
𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 0.18/𝛾𝑐 …………………………………………. ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 (1)Note

Taking the area of reinforcement ϕ8c/c150, and effective depth of 181mm. the distributed design
load over the strip is 6.51KN/m2.the clear distance of 1.5m and having reinforcement area of
334.11mm2.
𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 6.51 (0.5 ∗ 1.5𝑚 − 0.181𝑚) ∗ 1𝑚
𝑚2
𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 3.7𝐾𝑁
1
(𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 ∗ 𝑘(100 ∗ 𝜌𝑙 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘)3)𝑏𝑤𝑑 , the component k1σcp is zero because we don’t
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
(𝑉𝑚𝑖𝑛)𝑏𝑤𝑑
have any axial load supported on the slab.
0.18
𝐶𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = =0.12
1.5

200
𝑘 = 1 + √181 =2.05…. Take k=2
.
2
𝜌𝑙 = 334.11𝑚𝑚 = 1.846𝑥10 − 3
1000𝑚𝑚∗181𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 36
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
1
(0.12) ∗ 2(100 ∗ 1.846 ∗ 10−3 ∗ 25)3)1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 181𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 3 1
(0.035 ∗ 22 ∗ 252) 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 181𝑚𝑚

72.32𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
89.6𝐾𝑁
Take 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 89.6KN
Since the value of acting shear which is 3.7KN is less than the design shear resistance of the sab
without shear reinforcement which is 89.6KN no provision of shear reinforcement is required.

2.3 Load transfer from slab to beam

The supporting beams will carry loads transferred from the slabs of triangular or trapezoidal
patterns. To simplify structural analysis of beams by transforming triangular and trapezoidal slab
loads to equivalent uniform distributed load. The loads that we have transferred to the supporting
beams are un-factored and the dead load and live loads are transferred separately.

Figure 2-6 Trapezoidal load distribution and its equivalent rectangular load distribution
Sample calculation
𝑣 = 𝑣𝑠𝑥, 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑙 = 𝑙𝑦 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑣 = 𝑣𝑠𝑦 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑛 𝑙 = 𝑙𝑥
For panel 1
𝑉𝑥,𝑐 = 𝛽𝑣𝑥,𝑐 ∗ 𝑤 ∗ 𝑙𝑥
𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑥,𝑐 = 0.56 ∗ 8.51 ∗ 3.76𝑚 =17.92 KN/m
𝑚2
𝑉𝑥,𝑑 = 𝛽𝑣𝑥,𝑑 ∗ 𝑤 ∗ 𝑙𝑥
𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑥,𝑑 = 0.37 ∗ 8.51 ∗ 3.76𝑚 =11.84 KN/m
𝑚2
𝑉𝑦,𝑐 = 𝛽𝑣𝑦,𝑐 ∗ 𝑤 ∗ 𝑙𝑥
𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑦,𝑐 = 0.4 ∗ 8.51 ∗ 3.76𝑚 =12.8 KN/m
𝑚2

AAiT Page 37
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑉𝑦,𝑑 = 𝛽𝑣𝑦,𝑑 ∗ 𝑤 ∗ 𝑙𝑥
𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑦,𝑑 = 0.26 ∗ 8.51 ∗ 3.76𝑚 = 8.32 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
Table 2-14 Un-factored dead load transferred from two-way panels of the slab to beam

1st to 4th SHEAR FORCE

Floor COEFFICIENT SHEAR FORCE
DEAD
LOAD
Panel LY LX LY/LX βvx,c βvx,d βvy,c βvy,d (KN/m2) Vx,c Vx,d Vy,c Vy,d
1 5.55 4.65 1.473 0.56 0.37 0.4 0.26 8.51 17.92 11.84 12.80 8.32
2 5.55 5.53 1.4 0.52 0.34 0.36 0 7.47 10.10 6.60 6.99 0.00
3 5.55 5.53 1.56 0.56 0.37 0.4 0.26 7.67 16.15 10.67 11.54 7.50
4 5.53 3.65 1.56 0.55 0.36 0.4 0.26 6.72 13.90 9.10 10.11 6.57
5 5.53 3.65 1.323 0.46 0 0.36 0.24 7.11 13.34 0.00 10.44 6.96
6 4.45 3.65 1.323 0.55 0.36 0.4 0.26 5.37 11.09 7.26 8.07 5.24
7 3.65 3.2 1.47 0.149 0.25 0.47 0.31 6.249 10.98 11.47 8.47 5.78

Table 2-15 Un-factored live load transferred from two-way panels of the slab to beam

1st to 4th SHEAR FORCE

floor COEFFICIENT SHEAR FORCE
LIVE
LOAD
Panel LY LX LY/LX βvx,c βvx,d βvy,c βvy,d (KN/m2) Vx,c Vx,d Vy,c Vy,d
1 5.55 4.65 1.473 0.56 0.37 0.4 0.26 2.00 4.21 2.78 3.01 1.96
2 5.55 5.53 1.4 0.52 0.34 0.36 0 2.00 4.24 2.77 2.94 0.00
3 5.55 5.53 1.56 0.56 0.37 0.4 0.26 2.00 4.21 2.78 3.01 1.96
4 5.53 3.65 1.56 0.55 0.36 0.4 0.26 2.00 4.14 2.71 3.01 1.96
5 5.53 3.65 1.323 0.46 0 0.36 0.24 2.00 3.75 0.00 2.94 1.96
6 4.45 3.65 1.323 0.55 0.36 0.4 0.26 2.00 4.14 2.71 3.01 1.96
7 3.65 3.2 1.47 0.55 0.36 0.4 0.26 2.00 3.19 2.54 4.12 1.83

AAiT Page 38
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
2.4 Load transfer from the cantilever parts of the slab to beam
Sample calculation
Load transferred from “C1” and “C2”

Figure 2-7 Un-factored dead load on C1 and C2

𝑢𝑛𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏(𝑝) = 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 ∗ 𝑠𝑝𝑎𝑛 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ + 𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑
𝐾𝑁
𝑃𝑑 = 6.51 ∗ 1.65𝑚 + 1.7 𝐾𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
𝑃𝑑 = 12.44KN/m
Following the same procedure, we have determined the loads transferred from the cantilever parts
to the supporting beams. And they are tabulated as shown below.
Table 2-16 Un-factored dead and live loads from the cantilever part of the slab to the supporting
beams

Panels Dead load(KN/m) Live load(KN/m)

C1 12.44 3.3
C2 12.2 3.3
C3 12.44 3.3

AAiT Page 39
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 3: Analysis and Design of Staircase

3.1 Introduction
Stair are set of steps leading from one floor to another and are provided in building to afford a
means of communication between the various floors. And steps arranged in series and placed in
an enclosed is called staircase.
Primary function of stair
• To provide a means of circulation between floor levels.
• Establish a safe and easy means of travel between floor levels.
• Provide a means of conveying fitting and furniture between floor levels.
Technical terminologies
Step: is a portion of stair which permits ascent and descent. And it is comprised of a tread and a
riser.
Tread: is the horizontal member of stair.
Going: is the horizontal distance between the nosing or front edges of two consecutive steps.
Riser: is the vertical member of stair.
Rise: is the vertical distance between the upper surfaces of two consecutive steps.
Nosing: it is the projecting part of beyond the face of the riser.
Flight: is a continuous set of steps between floors and /or landing.
Landing: is a platform between two flights.
Baluster: is the vertical member which supports the hand rail.
Hand rail: is a rounded or molded member of wood or metal fixed on the top of baluster.
Head room: is the minimum clear vertical distance between the tread and overhead structure.
Soffit: it is the underside of the stair.
Run: it is the total length of the stair in a horizontal plane, including landing.
Newel post: is the vertical member which is placed at the end of flight to connect the end sting
and hand rail.
Winder: are tapering step which are provided for changing the direction of stair.

AAiT Page 40
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 3-1 Staircase and its component

3.1.1 Classification of staircase

Stair case are classified based on
• Geometric configuration
• Structural classification
Based on Geometric configuration
Straight stairs: these stairs run straight between the two floors. And it is used for small
houses where there are restrictions in available width.

Figure 3-2 Straight stairs

Turning stairs: includes quarter turn stair, half turn stair, three quarter turn stairs and
bifurcating stairs.

AAiT Page 41
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
a) Quarter turn stair: is the one which changes its direction either to the left or to
the right. And the turn being affected by introducing a quarter space landing or
by providing winders.

Figure 3-3 Quarter turn stair

b) Half turn stair: is the one which has its direction reversed or changed for1800.

Figure 3-4 Half turn stair

c) Three quarter turn stairs: has its direction changed three times with its upper
flight crossing the bottom one .and such type of stair is used when the length of
the stair room is limited and when the vertical distance between the two floors
is quite large.

d) Bifurcated stairs: the stair has a wider at the bottom, which bifurcates into two
narrow flight one turning to the left and the other to the right.

AAiT Page 42
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 3-5 Bifurcated stairs

Based on structure
Stair slab spanning longitudinally: Here, one or more supports are provided parallel to the
rise for slab bending longitudinally. Figure 3-6 show different support arrangements of a
two flight.

Figure 3-6 Stair slab spanning longitudinally

Stair slab spanning transversally: Here, either the waist slabs or the slab components of
isolated tread-slab and trade-riser units are supported on their sides or are cantilevers along
the width direction from a central beam. The slabs thus bend in a transverse vertical plane.
The following are the different arrangements:

a) Slab supported between two stringer beams or walls.

AAiT Page 43
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 3-7 Slab supported between two stringer beams or walls

b) Cantilever slabs from a spandrel beam or wall.

Figure 3-8 Cantilever slabs from a spandrel beam or wall

c) Doubly cantilever slabs from a central beam

Figure 3-9 Doubly cantilever slabs from a central beam

3.1.2 Detailing of landing going junction

At the junction there are two cases as shown in the Figure 3-10 below.

AAiT Page 44
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 3-10 Resultant tensional force at the junction

Case 1: there is no problem due to resultant force due to tension
Case 2: there is problem due to resultant force due to tension, correct detailing procedures must be
followed to avoid the failure of concrete due to resultant force.

3.2 Analysis and design of staircase

AAiT Page 45
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 3-11 Top and sectional view of staircase

Number of riser(N) = (tread + 1) =(6 + 1)=7

Height of riser = H⁄N =1.12m⁄7= 16cm

3.2.1 Depth of deflection

Our stair is treated as simply supported solid slab than according to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section
7.4 Table 7.4N k =1 for simply supported beam or slab.
l = 1* 11+1.5 25 * 0.005 *500
d  0.005 400

l = 23.125
d
For flight 1 ( l = 2.97m , )
d = l / 23.125 = 2.97m / 23.125 = 128.43mm

For flight 2( l = 1.5m )

d = l / 23.125 = 1.5m / 23.125 = 64.86mm
Taking the maximum deflection depth
128.43𝑚𝑚
𝑑 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
64.86𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 46
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑑 = 128.43𝑚𝑚 Then

𝐷 = 𝑑 + 1⁄2 Ø + 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟

Where 𝑑 = 128.43𝑚𝑚 , Ø = 10𝑚 , 𝑐𝑜𝑣𝑒𝑟 = 25𝑚𝑚

𝐷 = 128.43𝑚𝑚 + 1⁄2 10𝑚𝑚 + 25𝑚𝑚 = 158.43𝑚𝑚 ≅ 160𝑚𝑚

3.2.2 Stairs loading

Table 3-1 Material used with their unit weight and thickness

Material type Unit weight(KN/m2) Thickness (cm)

Cement screed 23 3
Concrete 25 16
Plastering 17 2
Marble 27 2

Calculation of dead load using 1m width Flight 2

Step dead load

𝑘𝑁
Dead load of cement screed = 𝑡𝑐𝑠 ∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑠 = 0.03𝑚 ∗ 23 = 0.69𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
𝑘𝑁
Dead load of marble = 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑟 ∗ 𝛾𝑚𝑎𝑟 = 0.02𝑚 ∗ 27 = 0.54𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
𝐾𝑁
Dead load of concrete = 𝑡 ∗ 𝛾 = 0.16𝑚 ∗ 0.5 ∗ 25 = 2𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑐𝑜𝑛 𝑐𝑜𝑛 𝑚2

Dead load of step = ∑(𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑠, 𝐷𝑙𝑚𝑎𝑟, 𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑜𝑛)

= 0.69𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 0.54𝐾𝑁/𝑚 + 2𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Dead load of step = 3.23kN/m
Riser dead load
𝑁∗( 𝑡𝑐𝑠∗ ℎ𝑐𝑠∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑠)
Dead load of cement screed = 6∗(0.16∗0.03∗23)
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 1.5 = 0.4416 𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑁∗( 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑟∗ ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟∗ 𝛾𝑚𝑎𝑟) 6∗(0.16∗0.02∗27)
Dead load of marble = = = 0.3456 𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 1.5

Riser dead load = ∑(Dlcs , Dlmar)

Riser dead load = 0.4416𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 0.3456𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Riser dead load=0.7872kN/m

AAiT Page 47
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Waist dead load
96𝑐𝑚 96
𝑡𝑎𝑛 ɵ = , ɵ = 𝑡𝑎𝑛−1 ( ) = 32.620
150𝑐𝑚 150

𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑐 = 96 = 1.78m
𝑠𝑖𝑛 32.620
𝑡𝑐𝑜𝑛∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑜𝑛∗𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑐
Dead load of concrete = 0.16∗1.78∗25
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 1.5 = 4.747kN/m
𝑡𝑝𝑙∗ 𝛾𝑝𝑙∗𝑙𝑖𝑛𝑐
Dead load plastering = = 0.02∗1.78∗17 = 0.356𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 1.5

Waist dead load =∑(𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑜𝑛 , 𝐷𝑙𝑝𝑙)

𝐾𝑁 𝐾𝑁
Waist dead load= 4.747 + 0.356
𝑚 𝑚

Waist dead load = 5.103 kN/m

Total dead load on the stairs slab
𝐷𝐿𝐼𝑇 = 𝐷𝐿𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑝 + 𝐷𝐿𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑒𝑟 + 𝐷𝐿𝑤𝑎𝑖𝑠𝑡
𝐷𝐿𝐼𝑇 = 3.23𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 0.7872𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 5.103𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Total dead load on the stairs slab = 𝐷𝐿𝐼𝑇 = 9.1202 𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Imposed load on flight 2

According to ES EN 1991-1-1:2015 table 6.2 for category A live load for stair is 4 kN/m2.
𝑘𝑁
𝐿. 𝐿 = 4 ∗ 1𝑚 = 4𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2

Design load and moment for flight 2

𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑, 𝑃𝑑 = 1.35 ∗ 𝐷𝐿𝐼𝑇 + 1.5 ∗ 𝐿. 𝐿

𝑃𝑑 = 1.35 ∗ 9.12 + 1.5 ∗ 4 = 18.312 𝑘𝑁/𝑚
1.5 1.5 1.15
𝐷𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑚𝑜𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡, 𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑀𝑑𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 = 𝑀𝐷 = 18.312 ∗ ∗( + ) 𝑘𝑁𝑚
2 4 2
𝑀𝐷 = 13.0473kNm
Load transfer from flight 2 to flight 1

4 ∗ 1.5
(
𝐹𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑙𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑, 𝑊 =
𝑅𝐴2 ) = 2.609𝑘𝑁/𝑚
=
1.15 1.15𝑚

AAiT Page 48
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
9.12 ∗ 1.5
( )
2
𝐹𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑑𝑒𝑎𝑑 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑, 𝑊 = 𝑅𝐴 = = 5.948𝑘𝑁/𝑚
1.15 1.15𝑚

Calculation of dead load using 1m width Flight 1

Step dead load

𝑘𝑁
Dead load of cement screed = 𝑡𝑐𝑠 ∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑠 = 0.03𝑚 ∗ 23 = 0.69𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
𝑘𝑁
Dead load of marble = 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑟 ∗ 𝛾𝑚𝑎𝑟 = 0.02𝑚 ∗ 27 = 0.54𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
𝑘𝑁
Dead load of concrete = 𝑡 ∗ 𝛾 = 0.16𝑚 ∗ 0.5 ∗ 25 = 2𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑐𝑜𝑛 𝑐𝑜𝑛 𝑚2

Dead load of step = ∑(𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑠 , 𝐷𝑙𝑚𝑎𝑟, 𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑜𝑛)

= 0.69𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 0.54𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 2𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Dead load of step = 3.23kN/m
Riser dead load
𝑁∗( 𝑡𝑐𝑠∗ ℎ𝑐𝑠∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑠)
Dead load of cement screed = 7∗(0.16∗0.03∗23)
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ = 1.8 = 0.429𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑁∗( 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑟∗ ℎ𝑚𝑎𝑟∗ 𝛾𝑚𝑎𝑟) 7∗(0.16∗0.02∗27)
Dead load of marble = = = 0.336𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑗𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑒𝑛𝑔𝑡ℎ 1.8

Riser dead load = ∑(𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑠 , 𝐷𝑙𝑚𝑎𝑟)

= 0.429𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 0.336𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Riser dead load=0.765𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Waist dead load
1.12cm 1.12
tan ɵ = , ɵ = tan−1 ( ) = 31.890
180cm 180

linc = 1.12 = 2.12m

sin 31.890
tcon∗ γcon∗linc
Dead load of concrete = 0.16∗2.12∗25
projected length = 1.8 = 4.711kN/m
tpl∗ γpl∗linc
Dead load plastering = = 0.02∗2.12∗17 = 0.4kN/m
projected length 1.8

Waist dead load =∑(𝐷𝑙𝑐𝑜𝑛 , 𝐷𝑙𝑝𝑙)

𝑘𝑁 𝑘𝑁
= 4.711 + 0.4
𝑚 𝑚

Waist dead load = 5.11 kN/m

AAiT Page 49
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Total dead load on stairs slab
𝐷𝐿𝑇 = 𝐷𝐿𝑠𝑡𝑒𝑝 + 𝐷𝐿𝑟𝑖𝑠𝑒𝑟 + 𝐷𝐿𝑤𝑎𝑖𝑠𝑡
𝐷𝐿𝑇 = 3.23𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 0.7651𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 5.11𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Total dead load on the inclined slab = DLIT = 9.105 kN/m
Landing dead load
Total dead load of landing =𝐷𝐿𝐿𝑇 = 𝑡𝑐𝑠 ∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑠 ∗ 𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑟 ∗ 𝛾𝑚𝑎𝑟 ∗ 𝑡𝑐𝑜𝑛 ∗ 𝛾𝑐𝑜𝑛 ∗ 𝑡𝑝𝑙 ∗ 𝛾𝑝𝑙 +
𝑊 𝑑𝑒𝑎𝑑 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑓𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 2
= 27 ∗ 0.02 + 0.03 ∗ 23 + 0.16 ∗ 25 + 17 ∗ 0.02 + 7.93 = 11.52𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Total dead load of landing = 𝐷𝐿𝐿𝑇 = 11.52𝐾𝑁/𝑚
Imposed load
𝑘𝑁
Total imposed on the stairs slab = 𝐿. 𝐿 = 4 ∗ 1𝑚 = 4𝑘𝑁/𝑚
𝑚2
Total imposed on landing =𝐿𝐿𝐿 = 𝐿. 𝐿 + 𝑊 𝑙𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑓𝑙𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 2
= 4 𝑘𝑁/𝑚 + 2.609 𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Total imposed load on landing=LLL = 6.609 kN/m
Design load and moment for the flight

Design load for the stairs slab

Design load, Pd = 1.35 ∗ DLIT + 1.5 ∗ L. L
𝑃𝑑 = 1.35 ∗ 9.105 + 1.5 ∗ 4
𝑃𝑑 = 18.292𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Design load for landing
Design load, 𝑃𝑑 = 1.35 ∗ 𝐷𝐿𝐿𝑇 + 1.5 ∗ 𝐿𝐿𝐿
𝑃𝑑 = 1.35 ∗ 11.52 + 1.5 ∗ 6.609
𝑃𝑑 = 25.47 𝑘𝑁/𝑚
Design moment for flight 1
Design moment, 𝑀𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑀𝑑𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 = 𝑀𝐷 = 22.696𝑘𝑁𝑚
𝑀𝐷 = 22.696𝑘𝑁𝑚

AAiT Page 50
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
3.2.3 Design of staircase for flexure
Material used and geometry
𝑓𝑦𝑑 = 347.83Mpa
𝑓𝑐𝑑 =14.167Mpa
𝑑 = 128.43𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑡 = 1000𝑚𝑚
3.14∗Ø 2
Using reinforcement Ø 10 then 𝑎𝑠 = = 78.5𝑚𝑚2
4

Flight 2, Design for main reinforcement bar (principal reinforcement)

𝑀𝐷 = 𝑀𝑠𝑑 = 13.0473𝑘𝑁𝑚
From general design chart and design table to ES EN 1992-1-1:2014 Table 2.2 design table for C-
12/15 – C-50/60
𝑀𝑠𝑑 13.0473 ∗ 106𝑁𝑚𝑚
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = = = 0.5586
𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏𝑡 ∗ 𝑑2 14.167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 128.432𝑁𝑚𝑚
Using 𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 0.5586 ,𝑘𝑧 = 0.969 … . from design table 2.2 for C12/25 − C50/60
𝑍 = 𝑘𝑧 ∗ 𝑑 = 0.969 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚 = 124.40𝑚𝑚
𝑀𝑠𝑑 13.0473 ∗ 106𝑁𝑚𝑚 = 270.28mm2
𝐴𝑠 = = 𝑁
𝑓𝑦𝑑 ∗ 𝑍 387.83 ∗ 124.4𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚 2
𝐴𝑠 = 270.28𝑚𝑚2
Check for minimum and maximum reinforcement area
Minimum requirement
2.6
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.26 𝑁 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.4𝑚𝑚 ≥ 0.0013 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.4𝑚𝑚
387.83
𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2 ≥ 166.959𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2 < 𝐴𝑠 = 270.28𝑚𝑚2 … … … … … … … … . ok Because According to EN
EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 9.2 Sections containing less reinforcement than As,min should be
considered as unreinforced.

AAiT Page 51
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Maximum requirement
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.004 ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 160𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6400𝑚𝑚2
As,max = 6400mm2 > As = 270.28mm2 … … … … … … … … . ok! Because According to ES EN
1992-1-1:2015 section 9.2 the cross-sectional area of tension or compression reinforcement should
not exceed As,max outside lap locations.
Therefore, provide 𝐴𝑠 = 270.28𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 270.28𝑚𝑚2
Flight 2, Secondary transvers reinforcement
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 9.3.1.1 Secondary transverse reinforcement of not less
than 20% of the principal reinforcement should be provided in one way slabs. In areas near
supports transverse reinforcement to principal top bars is not necessary where there is no transverse
bending moment. Staircase is treated as one-way slab. Therefore, secondary transverse
reinforcement for staircase is Ast = 20%As,provided .
Where

Ast Is area of Secondary transverse reinforcement, mm2, and

As,provided Is area of principal reinforcement provided, mm2

𝐴𝑠𝑡 = 0.2 ∗ 270.28𝑚𝑚2

Ast = 54.056mm2
Check for minimum and maximum reinforcement area
Minimum requirement
𝐴𝑠𝑡 = 54.056𝑚𝑚2 > 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2 … … … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘. Therefore, use area minimum as
secondary reinforcement.
𝐴𝑠𝑡,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2
Calculation for spacing
Spacing for principal reinforcement
𝑏 ∗𝑎
𝑡 𝑠 1000𝑚𝑚∗50.26𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 = 𝐴𝑠,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 270.28𝑚𝑚2 = 185.98𝑚𝑚

𝑆 = 180𝑚𝑚
Spacing for secondary reinforcement

AAiT Page 52
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑏𝑡∗𝑎𝑠 1000𝑚𝑚∗50.26𝑚𝑚2
𝑆=𝐴 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2
= 231.56𝑚𝑚
𝑠𝑡,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑

𝑆 = 230𝑚𝑚
Check for maximum spacing
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 9.3.1.1 the spacing of bars should not exceed
Smax,slabs .
For principal reinforcement
3ℎ
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝑚𝑚
400
3 ∗ 160 480
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝑚𝑚 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝑚𝑚
400 400
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 400𝑚𝑚 > 𝑆 = 180𝑚𝑚 … … … . 𝑜𝑘
𝑆𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 180𝑚𝑚
For secondary reinforcement
3.5ℎ
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝑚𝑚
450
3.5 ∗ 160 560
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝑚𝑚 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 𝑚𝑚
450 450
𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 450𝑚𝑚 > 𝑆 = 230𝑚𝑚 … … … . 𝑜𝑘
𝑆𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 230𝑚𝑚
Therefore, provide Ø10 c/c 180mm for principal reinforcement bar and provide Ø10 c/c 230mm
for secondary reinforcement bar.
Flight 1, Design for main reinforcement bar (principal reinforcement)
𝑀𝐷 = 𝑀𝑠𝑑 = 22.696𝐾𝑁𝑚
𝑀𝑠𝑑 22.696 ∗ 106𝑁𝑚𝑚
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = = = 0.097
𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏𝑡 ∗ 𝑑2 14.167 ∗ 1000 ∗ 128.432𝑁𝑚𝑚
Using 𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 0.097 ,𝑘𝑧 = 0.9475 … . 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑑𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑡𝑎𝑏𝑙𝑒 2.2 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝐶12/25 − 𝐶50/60
𝑍 = 𝑘𝑧 ∗ 𝑑 = 0.9475 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚 = 121.687𝑚𝑚
𝑀𝑠𝑑 13.0473 ∗ 106𝑁𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠 = = 𝑁 = 481.406mm2
𝑓𝑦𝑑 ∗ 𝑍 387.83 ∗ 121.687𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚 2
𝐴𝑠 = 481.406𝑚𝑚2

AAiT Page 53
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Check for minimum and maximum reinforcement
Minimum requirement
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2 < 𝐴𝑠 = 481.406𝑚𝑚2 … … … . 𝑜𝑘
Maximum requirement
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6400𝑚𝑚2 > 𝐴𝑠 = 481.406𝑚𝑚2 … … … . 𝑜𝑘
Therefore, 𝐴𝑠,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 481.406𝑚𝑚2
Design for secondary reinforcement bar
𝐴𝑠𝑡 = 0.2 ∗ 481.406𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠𝑡 = 96.2812𝑚𝑚2
Check for minimum reinforcement
Minimum requirement
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2 > 𝐴𝑠𝑡 = 96.2812𝑚𝑚2 … … … 𝑛𝑜𝑡 𝑜𝑘
𝐴𝑠𝑡,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2
Check for spacing of bars
Spacing for principal reinforcement
𝑏 ∗𝑎
𝑡 𝑠 1000𝑚𝑚∗78.5𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 = 𝐴𝑠,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 481.406𝑚𝑚2 = 160𝑚𝑚

𝑆 = 160𝑚𝑚 < 𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 400𝑚𝑚

Sprovided = 160mm
Spacing for secondary reinforcement
𝒃 ∗𝒂
𝒕 𝒔 1000𝑚𝑚∗50.26𝑚𝑚2
𝑆 = 𝑨𝒔𝒕,𝒑𝒓𝒐𝒗𝒊𝒅𝒆𝒅 = 217.0467𝑚𝑚2 = 230𝑚𝑚

𝑆 = 230𝑚𝑚 < 𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥,𝑠𝑙𝑎𝑏𝑠 = 450𝑚𝑚

𝑆𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 230𝑚𝑚

3.2.4 Design of staircase for shear

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 6.2.1 For member’s subject to predominantly
uniformly distributed loading the design shear force need not to be checked at a distance less than
d from the face of the support. Any shear reinforcement required should continue to the support.
In addition, it should be verified that the shear at the support does not exceedVRd,max.

AAiT Page 54
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Check if the 𝐕𝐑𝐝,𝐦𝐚𝐱 greater than 𝐕𝐄𝐝 at the support
According ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 6.2.3 equation 6.9 the design value of the maximum
shear force which can be sustained by the member, limited by crushing of the compression struts
is calculated as follows:
𝛼𝑐𝑤 ∗ 𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑧 ∗ 𝑣1 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑑
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 =
(𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝜃 + 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝜃)
Where

αcw is a coefficient taking account of the state of the stress in the compression chord
bw 1m width of the slab to be analysis, mm
v1 is a strength reduction factor for concrete cracked in shear
Θ is the angle between the concrete compression strut and the beam axis perpendicular
to the shear force
Z is the inner lever arm, for a member with constant depth, corresponding to the bending
moment in the element under consideration. In the shear analysis of reinforced
concrete without axial force.mm

𝛼𝑐𝑤 = 1 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑛𝑜𝑛 − 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑠

𝑧 = 0.9𝑑 = 0.9 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚 = 115.587𝑚𝑚
𝑓𝑐𝑘 25
𝑣1 = 0.6 (1 − ) = 0.6 (1 − ) = 0.54
250 250
𝑏𝑤 = 1000𝑚𝑚
𝜃 = 21.80
𝑉𝐸𝑑 at the support
For flight 2 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 13.734𝐾𝑁
For flight 1 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 33.91𝐾𝑁
1 ∗ 1000 ∗ 115.587𝑚𝑚 ∗ 0.54 ∗ 14.167𝑁/𝑚𝑚2
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 =
(2.5 + 0.4)
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 304.92𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 304.92𝐾𝑁 > 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 13.734𝐾𝑁 … … … … … … … … … … 𝑜𝑘
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 304.92𝐾𝑁 > 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 33.91𝐾𝑁 … … … … … … … … … … . . ok
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 in regions of the member where 𝐕𝐑𝐝,𝐜 ≥ 𝐕𝐄𝐝 no calculated
shear reinforcement is necessary.

AAiT Page 55
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Check if 𝐕𝐑𝐝,𝐜 is greater than 𝐕𝐄𝐝 𝐝 distance from the face of the support
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 6.2.2 equation (6.2.a and 6.2.b)
1
[𝑐𝑅𝑑 ∗ 𝑘 ∗ (100 ∗ 𝜌1 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘)3 ∗ 𝑘1 ∗ 𝜎𝑐𝑝] ∗ 𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑑
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
(𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝑘1 ∗ 𝜎𝑐𝑝) ∗ 𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑑
0.18 0.18
𝑐𝑅𝑑 = = = 0.12
𝛾𝑐 1.5

200
𝑘=1+√ = 2.25 ≤ 2.0
128.43

𝑘 = 2.0
𝐴𝑠
𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02
𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑑
For flight 2(𝐴𝑠 = 481.406𝑚𝑚2)
481.406𝑚𝑚2
𝜌1 = = 0.00374
1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚
𝜌1 = 0.00374
For flight 2(𝐴𝑠 = 270.28𝑚𝑚2)
270.28𝑚𝑚2
𝜌1 = = 0.0021
1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚
𝜌1 = 0.0021
𝑁𝑒𝑑
𝜎 = < 0.2𝑓 = 0……………………….because 𝑁 =0
𝑐𝑝 𝐴𝑐 𝑐𝑑 𝑒𝑑

3 1
2
𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘2 ∗ 𝑓 𝑐𝑘
3
𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 22 ∗ 250.5
𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.495
𝑉𝐸𝑑 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑑 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑓𝑎𝑐𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑡ℎ𝑒 𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡.
0.8916
For flight 1, 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 4.10946 + (29.79 ∗ ) = 26.81𝐾𝑁
1.17
For flight 2, 𝑉𝐸𝑑 = 11.408𝐾𝑁
1
[0.12 ∗ 2 ∗ (100 ∗ 0.00374 ∗ 25)3 ∗ 1 ∗ 0] ∗ 1000 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚2
For flight1, 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
(0.495 + 1 ∗ 0) ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 56
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
64.935𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
63.57𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 64.935𝐾𝑁 > 26.81𝐾𝑁 … … ok(no calculated shear reinforcement is necessary)
1

For flight 2, 𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {[0.12 ∗ 2 ∗ (100 ∗ 0.0021 ∗ 25)3 ∗ 1 ∗ 0] ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚
(0.495 + 1 ∗ 0) ∗ 1000𝑚𝑚 ∗ 128.43𝑚𝑚
56𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
63.57𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 63.57𝐾𝑁 > 11.408𝐾𝑁 … … ok(no calculated shear reinforcement is necessary)
Therefore, no need of shear reinforcement and minimum reinforcement is required for our staircase
because according to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 6.2.1. If 𝐕𝐑𝐝,𝐜 ≥ 𝐕𝐄𝐝 no shear reinforcement
is required and the minimum shear reinforcement may be omitted in members such as slabs (solid,
ribbed, or hollow core slabs) where transverse redistribution of loads is possible.

3.2.5 Load transfer from staircase to beam

Figure 3-12 Load transferred from staircase to beam from due to dead load.

Figure 3-13 Load transferred from stair to beam due to live load

AAiT Page 57
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 3-2 Loads transferred from stair to beam

Load type RA(KN) RB(KN)

Dead load 6.54 8.39
Live load 14.08 15.8

AAiT Page 58
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 4: Wind Load Analysis and Roof Design

4.1 Introduction
Wind is air in motion. Structure deflects or stops the wind, converting the wind’s kinetic energy
in to potential energy of pressure, thus creates wind loads.
The action of wind can be a type of suction or pressure to our structures both externally or
internally. However, these effects are more magnified for structures with more openings and large
surface areas. And we have focused on the sensitive part of the building which is roof.
The intensity of wind pressure on roofs depends on
• Velocity of the air
• Density of air
• Type of the roof system
• Angle of the induced wind
• Stiffness of the roofing elements
• Height of the structure up to the tip of the roof

4.2 Analysis of wind load on the roof

4.2.1 Wind parameter
Basic wind velocity

The basic wind velocity Vb, should be determined according to ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 expression
4.1.
𝑉𝑏 = 𝐶𝑑𝑖𝑟 ∗ 𝐶𝑠𝑒𝑎𝑠𝑜𝑛 ∗ 𝑉𝑏,𝑜
Where:

Vb,o Is the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity;

Cdir is the directional factor, its recommended value is 1. ES EN-1991-1-4:2015 section 4.2 NOTE2;
and
Cseason is the season factor, its recommended value is 1 ES EN-1991-1-4:2015 section 4.2 NOTE3

AAiT Page 59
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
The fundamental wind velocity can be taken as 22m/sec. the most intriguing question about wind
speed is ‘how fast does it have to blow in order to knock down a person’. The answer can be
simplified by equating the resisting force (static friction,𝐹𝑠 = 𝜇𝑚𝑔) with drag force (𝐹𝑑 =
1/2𝜌𝑣2𝐶𝑑𝐴), where ρ is the air density, 𝑣 is the wind velocity, 𝐶𝑑, is a dimensionless drag
coefficient and 𝐴 is our body’s cross-sectional area. Equating these two equations leads to a wind
speed of𝑣2 = 2𝜇𝑚𝑔/𝜌𝐶𝑑𝐴. Taking air density as 1.25 Kg/m3, an average body mass of 60Kg, a
coefficient of friction 0.4 and 𝐶𝑑𝐴 = 0.84m2 gives a wind speed of 21.2 m/s. therefor of 22m/s in
cities without detrimental history of storm or hurricane is justified.
𝑉𝑏 = 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 22𝑚/𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑉𝑏 = 22𝑚/𝑠𝑒𝑐
Mean wind velocity

The mean wind velocity Vm(z) at a height Z above the terrain depends on the terrain roughness
and orography and on the basic wind velocity, Vb, and should be determined using ES EN 1991-
1-4:2015 section 4.3.1(1) P, expression (4.3)
𝑉𝑚(𝑧) = 𝐶𝑟(𝑧) × 𝐶𝑜(𝑧) × 𝑉𝑏
Where

Cr(z) Is the roughness factor, and

Co(z) Is the orography factor.

According to ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 section 4.3.1 the orography factor can be taken as 1 unless
specified.
The roughness factor accounts for the variability of the mean wind velocity of the size of the
structure due to
• Height above ground level
• The ground roughness of the terrain up wind of the structure on the direction
considered (ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 section 4.3.2(1))
The recommended procedure for determination of roughness factor Co(Z) at height Z is given by
ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 expression (4.4) it is based on logarithmic velocity profile
𝑧
𝐶𝑟(𝑧) = 𝐾𝑟 ∗ 𝑙𝑛 ( ) 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑍𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ 𝑍 ≤ 𝑍𝑚𝑎𝑥 or 𝐶𝑟(𝑧) = 𝐶𝑟(𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛) 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑧 ≤ 𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝑧𝑜

Where

kr is the terrain factor depending on roughness length zo.

The terrain factor Kr should be determined using ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 expression (4.5).

AAiT Page 60
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑍𝑜 0.07
𝐾𝑟 = 0.19 ( )
𝑍0,𝐼𝐼

Where

Z0,II Is 0.05 (for terrain category II, ES EN 1991-1-4:2015,Table 4.8),

Zmin Is minimum height depend on terrain category, and

Zmax Is maximum height is to be taken 200m unless otherwise defined

Zo Is Roughness length depends on terrain category.

We have categorized Addis Ababa under terrain category IV on which Area in which at least 15%
of the surface is covered with buildings and their average height exceeds 15. According to ES EN
1991-1-4:2015, Table 4.1 the values of roughness length (zo) and minimum height (zmin) are 1m
and 10m respectively.
The total height of our building which is from the ground to the top of the roof is 37.285m.
𝑍𝑜 0.07
𝐾𝑟 = 0.19 ( )
𝑍0,𝐼𝐼
0.05 0.07
𝐾𝑟 = 0.91 ( ) = 0.234
0.05
𝑧
𝐶𝑟(𝑧) = 𝑘𝑟 𝑙𝑛
𝑧𝑜
37.285
𝐶 0.234 × 𝑙𝑛 ) = 0.846 Where 10m < 37.285m < 200m
𝑟(𝑧) ( 1

𝑉𝑚(𝑧) = 𝐶𝑟(𝑧) × 𝐶𝑜(𝑧) × 𝑉𝑏

𝑉𝑚(𝑧) = 0.846 × 1 × 22𝑚/𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑉𝑚(𝑧) = 18.612𝑚/𝑠𝑒𝑐
Large and considerably higher neighboring structures

According to ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 section 4.3.4, if the structure is to be located close to another

structure, that is at least twice as high as the average height of its neighboring structures, then it
could be exposed (dependent on the properties of the structure) to increased wind velocities for
certain wind directions. Such cases should be taken into account.
In our case since the building is not located in close to another structures the effect of large and
considerably higher neighboring structures we have not taken into consideration.

AAiT Page 61
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Closely spaced buildings and obstacles

According to ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 section 4.3.5 the effect of closely spaced buildings and other
obstacles may be taken into account.
In our case, since there are no closely spaced buildings and obstacles their effect have not taken
into consideration.
wind turbulence

According to ES EN 1991-1-4:2015, section 4.4(11) is the turbulence intensity iv(z) at height z is

defined as the standard deviation of the turbulence divided by mean wind velocity. And it should
be determined using ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 expression (4.7).
𝑘
𝑙𝑣(𝑧) 𝜎𝑣 = 𝑟
for Zmin<Z<Zmax
= 𝑣𝑚(𝑧) (𝑐 ( )∗𝑙𝑛(
𝑜𝑧
𝑧𝑜 )
𝑧0,𝐼𝐼

𝑙𝑣(𝑧) = 𝑙𝑣(𝑧𝑚𝑖𝑛) for Z<Zmin

Where

k1 Is the turbulence factor its recommended value is 1,

co(z) Is orography factor ,

zo Is roughness length, and

σv Is the standard deviation.

The recommended procedure for determination of the standard deviation is given by ES EN 1991-
1-4:2015 expression 4.6.
𝜎𝑣 = 𝐾𝑟 ∗ 𝑉𝑏 ∗ 𝐾𝑙
𝜎𝑣 = 0.234 × 22𝑚/𝑠𝑒𝑐 × 1
𝜎𝑣 = 5.148
𝑙𝑣(𝑧) = 𝜎𝑣
𝑣𝑚(𝑧)

𝑙 5.148
𝑣(37.285) = 18.6215

Determine the peak velocity pressure

The peak velocity pressure qp(2)at height z, which includes mean and short term velocity
fluctuations, should be determined by ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 Expression (4.8)
1
𝑞𝑝(𝑧) = [1 + 7𝑙𝑣(𝑧)] ∗ ∗ 𝑣𝑚(𝑧)2 ∗ 𝜌 = 𝐶𝑒(𝑧)𝑞𝑏
2

AAiT Page 62
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where

ρ Is the air density which depends on the attitude, temperature, and barometric pressure to be
expected in the region during wind storms, and

ce(z) Is exposure factor

The exposure factor Ce(z) should be determined by ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 expression (4.9)

.𝐶𝑒(𝑍) = 𝑞𝑝(𝑧)/𝑞𝑏
Where qb is the basic velocity pressure, the recommended procedure for its determination is given
by ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 expression 4.9.
1
𝑞 = ∗ 𝜌 ∗ 𝑣2
𝑏 2 𝑏

According to ES EN 1991-1-4:2015, the recommended value of air density is 1.25kg/m3.

𝑞𝑝(37.285) = [1 + 7 ∗ 𝑙𝑣(37.285)] ∗ 𝜌 ∗ 𝑉2𝑚(37.285)
𝑚
𝑞 = [1 + 7 ∗ 0.2766] ∗ 1.25 𝑘𝑔/𝑚3 ∗ (18.62 2)
𝑝(37.285) )
𝑠𝑒𝑐

𝑞𝑝(37.285) = 0.6357 𝐾𝑁/𝑚2

4.2.2 Wind pressure on surfaces

External wind pressure

The wind pressure acting on external surfaces, We, should be obtained using ES EN 1991-1-4:2015
expression 5.1.
𝑊𝑒 = 𝑞𝑝(𝑍𝑒) ∗ 𝐶𝑝𝑒
Where

𝑞𝑝(𝑍𝑒) Is the peak velocity pressure,

𝐶𝑝𝑒 Is the reference height for the external pressure, and

𝑍𝑒 Is the pressure coefficient for the external pressure

The external pressure coefficients cpe for buildings and parts of buildings depend on the size of the
loaded area A, which is the area of the structure that produces the wind action in the section to be
calculated. The external pressure coefficients are given for loaded areas A of 1 m2 and 10 m2 in in
ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 table 7.4 for the appropriate building configurations as cpe,1, for local
coefficients, and cpe,10, for overall coefficients, respectively (ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 section 7.2.1
(1)).

AAiT Page 63
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Note: the recommended procedure for calculating external pressure coefficient cpe for building
with loaded areas of between 1m2 and 10m2 is given in ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 figure 7.2 as follows:
-
𝐶𝑝𝑒 = 𝐶𝑝𝑒, 1 − (𝐶𝑝𝑒, 1 − 𝐶𝑝𝑒, 10) log10 𝐴
Where

𝐶𝑝𝑒, 1 Is external pressure coefficient for loaded area A of 1 m2 ,

𝐶𝑝𝑒, 10 Is external pressure coefficient for loaded area A of 10 m2, and

𝐴 Is loaded area A.

The type of roof on our building is duo pitch roof. According ES EN 1991-1-4:2015 section 7.2.5
for duo pitch roofs:
1. The roof, including protruding parts, should be divided in zones as shown in ES EN 1991-
1-4:2015 figure 7.8.
2. The reference height Ze should be taken as h
3. The pressure coefficients for each zone that should be used are given in ES EN 1991-1-
4:2015 table 7.4.
Table 4-1 wind condition parameter

Wind direction at Ɵ = 0 Wind direction at Ɵ = 90

Alpha (α) 150 Alpha (α) 150
cross wind dimension (b) 14.9m cross wind dimension (b) 13.1m
Height of the building (h) 37.285m Height of the building (h) 37.285
Truss span 15m - -

AAiT Page 64
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 4-1 General for duo pitch roof when pitch angle is positive

Figure 4-2 Zones for wind direction Ɵ = 0

AAiT Page 65
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 4-3 Zones for wind direction Ɵ = 90

Table 4-2 External pressure coefficients, wind direction ϴ = 0

Zone F G H J I
2
Area (m ) 5.55 11.1 75.4 22.2 75.4
Cpe,1 -1 - - - -
+0.2 - - - -
Cpe,10 -0.9 -0.8 -0.3 -1 -0.4
+0.2 +0.2 +0.2 0 0
Cpe -1.18 -0.8 -0.3 -1 -0.4
+0.2 +0.2 +0.2 0 0
Table 4-3 External pressure coefficients, wind direction ϴ = 90

Zone F G H I
Area (m2) 4.3 4.3 34.32 54.7
Cpe,1 -2 -2 -1.2 -0.5
Cpe,10 -1.3 -1.3 -0.6 -0.5
Cpe -1.55 -1.55 -0.6 -0.5
Table 4-4 External wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 0

Zone Cpe q(zo) (KN/m2) We(KN/m2)

AAiT Page 66
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
F -1.18 0.6357 -.0.75
+0.2 0.6357 +0.127
G -0.8 0.6357 -0.5
+0.2 0.6357 +0.127
H -0.3 0.6357 -0.19
+0.2 0.6357 +0.127
I -0.4 0.6357 -0.25
0 0.6357 0
J -1 0.6357 -0.6357
0 0.6357 0
Table 4-5 External wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 90

Zone Cpe q(ze) KN/m2) We (KN/m2)

F -1.55 0.6357 -0.98
G -1.55 0.6357 -0.98
H -0.6 0.6357 -0.38
I -0.5 0.6357 -0.32

Internal wind pressure

The internal wind pressure is the wind pressure acting on the internal surfaces of a building which
can calculated using ES EN 1991-1.4:2015 expression 5.2.
𝑊𝑖 = 𝑞𝑝(𝑍𝑖) ∗ 𝐶𝑝𝑖
Where

𝑞𝑝(𝑍𝑖) Is the peak velocity pressure,

𝐶𝑝𝑖 Is the pressure coefficient for the internal pressure, and

𝑍𝑖 Is the reference height for internal pressure.

The internal pressure coefficient, cpi, depends on the size and distribution of the openings in the
building envelope (ES EN 1991-1.4:2015 section 7.2.9(1) P). The openings of a building include
small opening such as: open windows, ventilators, chimneys, etc. as well as background
permeability such as air leakage around doors, windows services and through the building
envelope.

AAiT Page 67
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
A face of a building should be regarded as dominant when the area of the opening at that face is at
least twice the area of opening and leakages in the remaining faces of the building considered (ES
EN 1991-1.4:2015 section 7.2.9(4). And for a building with a dominant face the internal pressure
should be taken as a fraction of the external pressure at the openings of the dominant face. But
according to ES EN 1991-1.4:2015 section 7.2.9(6) for buildings without a dominant face, the
internal pressure coefficient cpi should be determined from ES EN 1991-1.4:2015 figure 7.13, and
is a function of the ratio of the height and the depth of the building, h/d, and the opening ratio μ
for each wind direction θ, which should be determined from ES EN 1991-1.4:2015 expression
(7.4).
(∑ 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔𝑠 𝑤ℎ𝑒𝑟𝑒 𝑐𝑝𝑒 𝑖𝑠 𝑛𝑒𝑔𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑣𝑒 𝑜𝑟 − 0.0)
𝜇=
∑ 𝑎𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑎𝑙𝑙 𝑜𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑖𝑛𝑔𝑠
Where it is not possible, or not considered justified (which is our case), to estimate µ for particular
case we can take cpi as more onerous of +0.2 and -0.3.
Table 4-6 Internal wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 0

Zone 𝑐𝑝𝑖 𝑞𝑝(𝑍𝑖) (KN/m2) 𝑊𝑖 (KN/m2)

F +0.2 0.6357 +0.127

-0.3 0.6357 -0.19
G +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19
H +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19
I +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19
J +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19

Table 4-7 Internal wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 90

Zone 𝑐𝑝𝑖 𝑞𝑝(𝑍𝑖) (KN/m2) 𝑊𝑖 (KN/m2)

F +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19
G +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19

AAiT Page 68
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

H +0.2 0.6357 +0.127

-0.3 0.6357 -0.19
I +0.2 0.6357 +0.127
-0.3 0.6357 -0.19

Net wind pressure

The net wind pressure on a wall, roof or element is the difference between the pressures on the
opposite surfaces taking due account of their signs. Pressure, directed towards the surface is taken
as positive, and suction, directed away from the surface as negative (ES EN 1991-1.4:2004 article
5.2 (3)). Examples are show on the figure below

Figure 4-4 wind pressure on surfaces

Table 4-8 Net wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 0

Zone We (KN/m2) Wi (KN/m2) Wnet (KN/m2)

F -0.75 +0.127 -0.88
+0.127 -0.19 +0.317
G -0.5 +0.127 -0.627
+0.127 -0.19 +0.317
H -0.19 +0.127 -0.317
+0.127 -0.19 +0.317
I -0.25 +0.127 -0.377
0 -0.19 +0.19
J -0.6357 +0.127 -0.763
0 -0.19 +0.19

AAiT Page 69
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 4-9 Net wind pressure, wind direction Ɵ = 90

Zone We (KN/m2) Wi (KN/m2) Wnet (KN/m2)

F -0.98 +0.127 -1.107
-0.19 -0.79
G -0.98 +0.127 -1.107
-0.19 -0.79
H -0.38 +0.127 -0.507
-0.19 -0.19
I -0.32 +0.127 -0.449
-0.19 -0.13

The maximum wind surface pressure on the roof will be:

Compression = +0.377 KN/m2
Suction = -1.107 KN/m2

4.3 Analysis and design of purlin

Purlins are beams used on trusses to support the sloping roof system between the adjacent trusses.
RHS, Channels, angle sections, and cold formed C- or Z-sections are widely used as purlins. They
are placed in an inclined position over the main rafters of the trusses. To avoid bending in the top
chords of roof trusses, it is theoretically desirable to place purlins only at panel points.

A purling having a length of 4.8m and 3.76m are used in our roof system. And the spacing between
the purlins is 1375mm.But we have designed the lattice purlin having a length of 4.08m because
of having greater deflection than the purlin having a length of 3.76m. In addition to this the depth
of the lattice purlin is 251mm and using 290mm the spacing between the reinforcement bars.

Figure 4-5 Lattice purlin

The analysis and design of the lattice purlin is carried out using SAP2000v19.2.0. And we have
used atrial section of RHS 30x30x3 for the external cords from the kality manual specification.
And a reinforcement bar having a diameter of 12mm and characteristic tensile strength of 400Mpa
for the diagonal members. The type of steel used form the specification for the external members
is hot-rolled carbon steel sheets having yield strength, ultimate strength, and elongation of 313

AAiT Page 70
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
KN/mm2 ,393KN/mm2, and 30mm respectively. The thickness of the still section is from 2mm to
6mm for structural hallow section.

Table 4-10 Mechanical properties of the steel section.

Material for external members

Type of steel Weight of Yield Tensile Elongation Thickness and purpose
zinc strength(Mpa) strength(Mpa) (mm)
coating
Hot-rolled - 313 393 30 Frm2-6mm for pressed
carbon steel products ,structural
sheets hollow sections and
general use

4.3.1 Purlin loading

Wind load on purlin

The wind load on purlin is the wind that is transferred from the roof cover, this is calculated as
surface wind pressure (both external and internal surface pressures) on the wind analysis section
of this document. And they were found as follows:
Maximum wind Compression pressure = +0.377 KN/m2
Maximum wind Suction pressure = -1.107 KN/m2
Dead load on purlin

In purling the dead load arises from the weight of the EGA sheet roof cover and the self-weight of
the purling itself. The weight form the EGA sheet covering is calculated below after appropriate
selection of EGA sheet but the self-weight of the purling is considered in SAP 2000 structural
design software.
Selection EGA sheet
The EGA sheet is the top cover of the roof and is selected from the products catalogue of kality
metal products factory. Taking a maximum wind surface load of 1.107 KN/m2 and purling spacing
of 1.375m, the load carrying capacity of EGA 300 having thickness of 0.35mm is 1.17 KN/m2
which is greater than the maximum wind surface load on our roof. Therefor EGA 300 corrugated
sheet is chosen as the roof cover our building.

AAiT Page 71
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 4-11 selected EGA sheet 300

Parameter Purling spacing(m) Thickness(mm) Area (mm2) Weight (KN/m3)

Value 1.375 0.35 350 77.08

Dead load = weight of EGA sheet 300 * thickness

Dead load = 77.08 KN/m3 * 0.00035m
Dead load = 0.2698KN/m
Imposed load on purlin

In ES EN 1991-1.1:2015 table 6.9 roofs are categorized according to their accessibility into three
categories and this are roofs not accessible except for normal maintenance and repair (category
H), roofs accessible with occupancy according to categories A to D (category I) and roofs
accessible for special services, such as helicopter landing areas (category K). in our case our
building is an apartment building, so it is fair to say that our roof is inaccessible except for normal
maintenance and repair which is roof the type of category H. Imposed loads for roofs of category
H is within the range 0.00 KN/m2 to 1.0 KN/m2 for 𝑞𝑘 and 𝑄𝑘 may be selected within the range
0.9 KN to 1.5 KN (ES EN 1991-1.1:2015 Table 6.10). The recommended values are: 𝑞𝑘= 0.4
KN/m2 and 𝑄𝑘= 1.0 KN.

4.3.2 Load transfer to purlin

Dead load = weight*thickness*purling spacing
Dead load = 77.08KN/m3 * 0.00035m*1.375m = 0.037 KN/m
Imposed load (dis) = 0.4KN/m2 * 1.375m = 0.55 KN/m
Imposed load (conc) = 1KN
Wind load (compression) = +0.377KN/m2 * 1.375m = +0.518 KN/m
Wind load (suction) = -1.107 KN/m2 * 1.375m =-1.522 KN/m

4.3.3 Load combination for purlin

According to ES EN 1990:2015 section 6.4.3.1(1) P for each critical load case, the design values
of the effects of actions (Ed) shall be determined by combining the value of actions that are
considered to occur simultaneously. Dead load and imposed load or dead load and wind load that
act on the purling have high probability of occurring simultaneously. But imposed loads and wind
loads have low probability occurring simultaneously thus the combination of effects of this actions
should be based on the design value of the leading variable action and the design combination
values of the accompanying variable actions. Therefor various combination of ultimate limit state
for persistent and transient design situations are used for design.

AAiT Page 72
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Values of ψ factor
Recommended value of ψ factored for the most common actions is obtained from ES EN
1990:2015 table A1.1 as follows: -
For actions of imposed loads category H: roofs ψ0 = 0
For actions of wind loads on building ψ0 = 0.6
Design value of actions in persistent and transient design situation
The load combination for transient and transient design situations is given in ES EN 1990:2015
A1.2 (B) expression 6.10 as follows: -
𝐸𝑑 = 𝛾𝐺𝑗,𝑠𝑢𝑝𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 𝛾𝑄1𝑄𝑘1 + 𝛾𝑄𝑖𝜓0,𝑖𝑄𝑘,𝑖

Where

𝛾𝐺𝑗,𝑠𝑢𝑝 Is the factor of safety for dead load (recommended 1.35)

𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 Is dead load

𝛾𝑄1 Is the factor of safety of the leading variable (recommended 1.5)

𝑄𝑘1 Is leading variable imposed load

𝑄𝑘,𝑖 Is accompanying variable imposed load

𝜓0,𝑖 Is multiplier for accompanying variable imposed load

Case 1: only dead load and imposed load

Combination 1, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑑)
Combination 2, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑)
Case 2: imposed load leading variable and wind load accompanying variable
Combination 3, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑑) + 1.5 ∗ 0.6𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛)
Combination 4, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑) + 1.5 ∗ 0.6𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛)
Combination 5, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑑) + 1.5 ∗ 0.6𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑠𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛)
Combination 6, 𝐸𝑑 = 1. 35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑) + 1.5 ∗ 0.6𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑠𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛)
Case 3: wind load leading variable and imposed load accompanying variable

AAiT Page 73
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Commination 7, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛) + 1.5 ∗ 0𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑑)
Combination 8, 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑖𝑜𝑛) + 1.5 ∗ 0𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑)
Combination 9, 𝐸𝑑 = 1𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑠𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛) + 1.5 ∗ 0𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑖𝑏𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑑)
Combination 10, 𝐸𝑑 = 1𝐺𝑘𝑗𝑠𝑢𝑝 + 1.5𝑄𝑘1(𝑠𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛) + 1.5 ∗ 0𝑄𝑘,𝑖(𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑐𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑)

4.3.4 Maximum bending moment and shear on the members result from
SAP2000v19.2.0
Maximum bending moment

Table 4-12 Maximum bending moment (at the mid span)

Member Design RHS Design Mmajor(KNm) Vmajor(KN)

section combination
Top RHS 30X30X3 Comb4 0.043 0.37
Bottom RHS 30X30X3 Comb8 0.019 0.05

Maximum shear

Table 4-13 Maximum shear force (support)

Member Design RHS Design Mmajor(KNm) Vmajor(KN)

section combination
Top RHS 30X30X3 Comb4 0.0241 0.36
Bottom RHS 30X30X3 Comb8 0.015 0.092

Figure 4-6 purlin sizing

From the analysis of the purlin using SAP2000V19.2.0 lattice purlin having cross-section of
30x30x3 is adequate. If we use the standard RHS purlin for the same loading a section having
100x60x4.5 RHS section is adequate also.

AAiT Page 74
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 4-7 Standard RHS section

4.3.5 Comparison between lattice purlin and standard RHS purlin

In order to decide which type of the purlin to use we should to determine their mass and take the
one which have the lesser mass.
Mass calculation
Mass per meter of standard RHS 100x60x4.5 from the kality manual is 10.26kg/m.
Length of the standard RHS100x60x4.5=4.8m
Mass of the standard RHS 100x60x4.5=10.26kg/m*4.8m=49.25kg
Total length of RHS30X30X3=0.29*14+0.29*15=8.41m
Total length of bar diameter=26*0.29=7.54m
𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝑝𝑒𝑟 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 12𝑚𝑚 𝑑𝑖𝑎𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 = 𝑢𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 ∗ 𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 𝑜𝑓 𝑟𝑒𝑖𝑛𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝑏𝑎𝑟
2
𝑤𝑒𝑖𝑔ℎ𝑡 𝐾𝑁 3.14∗(12𝑚𝑚)
𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑒𝑟 = 7850 𝑚3 ∗ 4

Weight/meter = 0.888KN/m
Table 4-14 Mass calculation of lattice purlin

Section Length(m) Kg/m kg

RHS30x30x3 8.41 2.36 19.85

ϕ12mm bar diameter 7.54 0.888 6.69

Total 26.54
The total dead load of standard RHS purlin is 49.25kg and the total dead load of the lattice purlin
is 26.54kg. The total dead weight of the standard RHS is almost twice of that lattice purlin. Due to
this reason the total weight transferred to the truss will be increased. This makes the section to be
used for the truss large which will make us uneconomical. Taking this into consideration we have
used lattice purlin.

AAiT Page 75
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
4.3.6 Serviceability limit state (Deflection requirement)
From the SAP2000V19.2.0 the maximum deflection is 3.6mm. And the allowable deflection
according to ES EN 1993-1-1 Table 4.1the recommended value for vertical deflection.
Table 4-15 Vertical deflection calculation

Condition Limiting value

δmax(mm) δ2(mm)
Roof generally L/200=4080/200=20.4mm L/250=4080/250=16.32mm

Figure 4-8 Vertical deflections to be considered

Since the maximum deflection is less than the limiting value of deflection the deflection
requirements are satisfied.

4.4 Truss analysis and design

For covering large industrial or residential areas, to protect them against rain sun, dust or other
natural vagaries, we require roofing. The material used for roofing are called covering, which may
be range from tiles, corrugated steel sheets to light FRP covers, EGA sheets and tarpaulins.
However, these materials are not structurally strong enough to support themselves and need to be
supported by steel or concrete structures. Beams are some of the more common structural element
to support roofs. But when the area and span also to be covered become too large, beams becomes
too heavy and uneconomical as structural members. The next most common type of roof are roof
supporting structures are truss elements, called roof truss.
Roof trusses are composed of tension and compression members joined together by welding or
riveting. The loads supported on the roofing elements are transferred from purlin. The shape of the

AAiT Page 76
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
roof trusses are largely determined largely by the area and space to be covered, the used under
which the covered premises is put and the type of roof cover used.
The span of the truss is15m having maximum spacing of 6m.
Table 4-16 Loads supported by the truss.

Load type Load

Load from EGA sheet 0.0269KN/m2
Concentrated live load 1KN
Distributed live load 0.4KN/m2
Wind load compression 0.377KN/m2
Wind load suction -1.107KN/m2

Load transferred to the joints of the truss members can be computed by

(𝑙𝑡𝑠,1+𝑙𝑡𝑠,2) (𝑙1+𝑙2)
𝑃= 𝑤∗ 2
∗ 2

Where

P is load at the node,

w is the areal load on the roof,

lts,1 Spacing between the truss under consideration and the truss on the left side it,

lts,2 Spacing between the truss under consideration and the truss on the right side it,

l1 Spacing between the nodes under consideration and the node on the left side of it, and

L2 Spacing between the nodes under consideration and the nodes on the right side it.

Sample calculation
Loads at node 1
(1.525+1.5250)
𝑆𝑢𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑖𝑚𝑝𝑜𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑙𝑜𝑎𝑑(𝐺𝑘, 𝑠𝑢𝑝𝑒𝑟) = 0.0269 ∗ 3.92 ∗ = 0.16𝐾𝑁
2
(1.525+1.5250)
Cocentrated live load(Qk, con) = 0.4 ∗ 3.92 ∗ = 2.39𝐾𝑁
2

Distributed live load = 1 ∗ 0.5 ∗ 2 = 1𝐾𝑁

(1.525+1.5250)
wind load compression(Qwind, comp) = 0.377 ∗ 3.92 ∗ = 2.25KN
2

AAiT Page 77
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
(1.525 + 1.5250)
wind load suction(Qwind, suc) = 1.107 ∗ 3.92 ∗ = −6.61𝐾𝑁
2
The dead weight of the purlin is computed using SAP2000V19.2.0 which is 0.14KN.
The loads transferred from the purlin to the truss can be computed by following the same procedure
.and the values at each node of the truss are tabulated as shown in the table below. Since the loads
transferred to the truss are inclined we can decompose the load by the pitch angle.
N.B The load combination used for the design of the roofing truss is the same as with the
combinations used for the purlin design.
Table 4-17 Loads at each joints of the load

Loads on each nods Decomposed load

Node Load Type Load at each node X-direction Z-direction
1 wind suction -6.61 0.00 -6.61

wind compression 2.25 0.00 2.25

live concentrated 1.00 0.00 1.00
live distributed 2.39 0.00 2.39
Dead load 0.14 0.00 0.14
super imposed 0.16 0.00 0.16
2 wind suction -6.29 -1.63 -6.29
wind compression 2.14 0.55 2.07
live concentrated 1.00 0.26 0.97
live distributed 2.27 0.59 2.19
Dead load 0.14 0.03 0.13
super imposed 0.15 0.04 0.14
3 wind suction -1.96 -0.51 -1.89
wind compression 2.03 0.53 1.96
live concentrated 1.00 0.26 0.97
live distributed 2.15 0.56 2.08
Dead load 0.14 0.03 0.13
super imposed 0.14 0.04 0.14
4 wind suction -5.96 -1.54 -5.76
wind compression 2.03 0.53 1.96
live concentrated 1.00 0.26 0.97

AAiT Page 78
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
live distributed 2.15 0.56 2.08
Dead load 0.14 0.03 0.13
super imposed 0.14 0.04 0.14
5 wind suction -5.96 -1.54 -5.76
wind compression 2.03 0.53 1.96
live concentrated 1.00 0.26 0.97
live distributed 2.15 0.56 2.08
Dead load 0.14 0.03 0.13
super imposed 0.14 0.04 0.14
6 wind suction -4.58 -1.19 -4.42
wind compression 1.56 0.40 1.51
live concentrated 1.00 0.26 0.97
live distributed 1.65 0.43 1.59
Dead load 0.14 0.03 0.13
super imposed 0.11 0.03 0.11
7 wind suction -1.61 -0.42 -1.56
wind compression 0.54 0.14 0.52
live concentrated 1.00 0.26 0.97
live distributed 0.58 0.15 0.56
Dead load 0.14 0.03 0.13

Figure 4-9 General loading of roofing truss

The truss elements are designed using SAP200V19.2.0 by taking a trial section for the governing
design combination,

AAiT Page 79
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 4-18 Sizing of truss members

Cord member Member Governing combo Size of the section

Top cord Top Combination 5 RHS 80X80X3.6
Bottom cord Bottom Combination 5 RHS 80X80X3.6
Vertical cord Vertical Combination 5 RHS 80X80X3.2
Diagonal member Member1 Combination 5 RHS 30X30X3.2
Member2 Combination 5 RHS 50X30X3.2

Member 1
Member2
Figure 4-10 Sizing of the truss section

AAiT Page 80
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 5: Design for Earthquake Resistance

5.1 Introduction
Earthquake-resistant design can be considered as the art of balancing the seismic capacity of
structures with the expected seismic demand to which they may be subjected. In this sense,
earthquake-resistant design is the mitigation of seismic risk, which may be defined as the
possibility of losses (human, social or economic) due to the effects of future earthquakes. Seismic
risk is often considered as the convolution of seismic hazard, exposure and vulnerability.
Exposure refers to the people, buildings, infrastructure, commercial and industrial facilities located
in an area where earthquake effects may be felt; exposure is usually determined by planners and
investors, although in some cases avoidance of major geo-hazards may lead to relocation of new
infrastructure.
Vulnerability is the susceptibility of structures to earthquake effects and is generally defined by
the expected degree of damage that would result under different levels of seismic demand; this is
the component of the risk equation that can be controlled by engineering design. Seismic hazards
are the potentially damaging effects of earthquakes at a particular location, which may include
surface rupture, tsunami run-up, liquefaction and landslides, although the most important cause of
damages on a global scale is earthquake induced ground shaking. The focus is exclusively on this
particular hazard and the definition of seismic actions in terms of strong ground motions. In the
context of probabilistic seismic hazard analysis (PSHA), seismic hazard actually refers to the
probability of exceeding a specific level of ground shaking within a given time.
If resources were unlimited, seismic protection would be achieved by simply providing as much
earthquake resistance as possible to structures. In practice, it is not feasible to reduce seismic
vulnerability to an absolute minimum because the costs would be prohibitive and certainly not
justified since they would be for protection against a loading case that may not even
occur during the useful life of the structure. Seismic design therefore seeks to balance the
investment in provision of seismic resistance against the level of damage, loss or disruption that
earthquake loading could impose. For this reason, quantitative assessment and characterization of
the expected levels of ground shaking constitute an indispensable first step of seismic design, and
it is this process of seismic hazard analysis.

5.2 Earth quake analysis

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3 there are three methods of earth quake analysis.

5.2.1 Lateral force method of analysis

The lateral force method of analysis is a simplified approach widely used for simple structures in
seismic standards and codes. It is based on the assumption that the influence of
higher vibration modes is negligible. According to ES EN 1998-1:2015, ‘this type of analysis may
be applied to buildings whose response is not significantly affected by contributions from

AAiT Page 81
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
modes of vibration higher than the fundamental mode in each principal direction’ ES EN 1998-
1:2015 considers that this requirement is deemed to be satisfied in buildings that are regular in
elevation and do have a fundamental period less than 2 s and four times the corner period 𝑇𝑐 of
the applicable design spectrum.
EBCS EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3.2.1 states that,
(1) P This type of analysis may be applied to buildings whose response is not
significantly affected by contributions from modes of vibration higher than the
fundamental mode in each principal direction.
(2) The requirement in (1)P of this sub clause is deemed to be satisfied in buildings
which fulfil both of the two following conditions.

d) They have fundamental periods of vibration T1 in the two main directions which
is smaller than the following values
4𝑇
𝑇1 ≤ { 𝑐
2.0𝑠
Where Tc Is the upper limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration
branch which given in ES EN 1998-1:2003 (E) Table 3.2 or 3.3
e) They meet the criteria for regularity in elevation given in ES EN 1998-1:2015
section 4.2.3.3

5.2.2 Modal response spectrum analysis

ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3.3.1 states that,
(1)P This type of analysis shall be applied to buildings which do not satisfy the
conditions given ES EN 1998-1:2015 in 4.3.3.2.1(2) for applying the lateral force method of
analysis.
(2)P The response of all modes of vibration contributing significantly to the global
response shall be taken into account.

5.2.3 Non-linear methods

ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3.4.1 states that,
(1)P The mathematical model used for elastic analysis shall be extended to include
the strength of structural elements and their post-elastic behavior.
Selecting an appropriate type of analysis for our building
4. Check to use lateral force method of analysis

Requirements:
4𝑇
a) 𝑇1 ≤ { 𝑐 Where T1 is fundamental period of vibration
2.0𝑠

AAiT Page 82
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Then according to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3.2.2 expression 4.6 for buildings with heights
of up to 40 m the value of T1 (s) may be approximated by the following expression
3
𝑇 =𝐶 𝐻 ⁄4
1 𝑡

Where

𝐶𝑡 is 0,085 for moment resistant space steel frames, 0,075 for moment resistant
space concrete frames and for eccentrically braced steel frames and 0,050 for all
other structures;

H is the height of the building, in m, from the foundation or from the top of a rigid
basement.

Then
Ct=0.075 for moment resistant space concrete frames
H=37.7 m
3⁄
𝑇 =𝐶 𝐻 4
1 𝑡
3
T1=0.075*(37.7) ⁄4 = 1.141 sec
As we have no soil data we assumed our site to be ground type A and we assumed type 2 spectrum
According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 3.2.2.2 table 3.3
Tc=0.25
4𝑇
𝑇1 ≤ { 𝑐
2.0𝑠
4 ∗ 0.25
1 sec≤ { 2 sec
1 sec
1 sec≤ { ………………..ok
2 sec
5. Check the criteria for regularity in elevation

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.2.3.3 the criteria for regularity in elevation are:
f) All lateral load resisting systems, such as cores, structural walls, or frames, shall
run without interruption from their foundations to the top of the building or, if
setbacks
at different heights are present, to the top of the relevant zone of the building.

g) Both the lateral stiffness and the mass of the individual storeys shall remain
constant or reduce gradually, without abrupt changes, from the base to the top of
a particular building.

AAiT Page 83
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
h) In framed buildings the ratio of the actual story resistance to the resistance
required by the analysis should not vary disproportionately between adjacent
storeys.

In our building no set backs are present as our building satisfy all above criteria. It is also regular
in elevation.

5.3 Base shear force

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3.2.2
(1)P The seismic base shear force𝐹𝑏, for each horizontal direction in which the
building is analyzed, shall be determined using the following expression:

𝐹𝑏 = 𝑆𝑑(𝑇1). 𝑚. 𝜆
Where

Sd(T1) Is the ordinate of the design spectrum at period 𝑇1,

T1 Is the fundamental period of vibration of the building for lateral motion in the
direction considered,
m Is the total mass of the building, above the foundation or above the top of a rigid
basement, and
λ Is the correction factor, the value of which is equal to: λ = 0,85 if T1 < 2 TC and
the building has more than two storeys, or λ = 1,0 otherwise.

Within the scope of ES EN 1998 the earthquake motion at a given point on the
surface is represented by an elastic ground acceleration response spectrum, henceforth
called an “elastic response spectrum”.

5.3.1 Design spectrum for elastic analysis

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 3.2.2.5, the design spectrum for elastic analysis of the
seismic action, Sd(T), is defined by the following expressions
2 𝑇 2.5 2
0 ≤ 𝑇 ≤ 𝑇 : 𝑆 (𝑇) = 𝑎 . 𝑆. [ + . ( − ]
𝐵 𝑑 𝑔 )
3 𝑇𝐵 𝜂 3
2.5
𝑇𝐵 ≤ 𝑇 ≤ 𝑇𝑐: 𝑆𝑑(𝑇) = 𝑎𝑔. 𝑆.
𝑞
2.5
= 𝑎 . 𝑆. . 𝑇𝐶.
𝑔 [𝑇 ]
𝑇𝐶 ≤ 𝑇 ≤ 𝑇𝐷: 𝑆𝑑 (𝑇) { 𝑞

≥ 𝛽 ∗ 𝑎𝑔

AAiT Page 84
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
2.5 𝑇𝐶 . 𝑇𝐷
𝑇𝐷 ≤ 𝑇 ∶ 𝑆𝑑 = 𝑎𝑔. 𝑆. . [ 2 ]
(𝑇) { 𝑞 𝑇
≥ 𝛽 ∗ 𝑎𝑔

Where

T is the vibration period of a linear single-degree-of-freedom system,

ag is the design ground acceleration on type A ground (𝑎𝑔 = 𝛾𝐼. 𝑎𝑔𝑅),

TB is the lower limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration branch,

TC is the upper limit of the period of the constant spectral acceleration branch,

TD is the value defining the beginning of the constant displacement response range
of the spectrum,

S is the soil factor, and

β is the lower bound factor for the horizontal design spectrum.

values of the periods 𝑇𝐵, 𝑇𝐶 and 𝑇𝐷 and of the soil factor S describing the shape of the elastic
response spectrum depend upon the ground type.
According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 2.2.5 for ground type A and for type 2 elastic response
spectra the values of S, 𝑇𝐵, 𝑇𝐶 and 𝑇𝐷 taken from ES EN 1998-1:2015 table 3.3
Table 5-1 Type 2 elastic response spectra for ground type A

S 𝑇𝐵 𝑇𝐶 𝑇𝐷

1 0.05 0.25 1.2

For TC ≤ T1 ≤ TD
𝑐 2.5 𝑇
𝑎 ∗𝑆 ( )
𝑔
𝑆𝑑(𝑇1)=𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑞 𝑇!
𝛽 ∗ 𝑎𝑔
𝑇ℎ𝑒 𝑑𝑒𝑠𝑖𝑔𝑛 𝑔𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑛𝑑 𝑎𝑐𝑐𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛, 𝑎𝑔 = 𝛾1𝑎𝑔𝑅, but 𝑎𝑔𝑅 =𝑎0 from national annex of Ethiopia
From zonation map Ethiopia for Addis Ababa
a0
=0.1 So a = 0.1 ∗ g=0.1*9.81 m⁄ =0.981 m⁄
g 0 s2 s2

AAiT Page 85
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

γ1 Is importance factor and According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.2.5 table 4.3 for importance class
II and Ordinary buildings, not belonging in the other categories shall be by definition equal to 1.0

𝑎𝑔=1 ∗ 0.981 𝑚⁄𝑠2 = 0.981 𝑚⁄𝑠2

q The behavior factor, according to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 5.3.3 a q of 1.5 may be used in
deriving the seismic action for DCM regardless of the structural system and the regularity in
elevation.
2.5 0.25𝑠𝑒𝑐
0.981 𝑚⁄ ∗ 1 ∗ ∗[ ]
𝑆 (𝑇 ) = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑠2 1.5 1𝑠𝑒𝑐
𝑑 1
0.2 ∗ 0.981 𝑚⁄𝑠2
0.358
𝑆𝑑 ( 𝑇1) = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 0.358 𝑚⁄𝑠2
0.196

The correction factor 𝜆

𝜆 = 0.85 if 𝑇1 ≤ 2𝑇𝑐 or otherwise 𝜆 = 1
𝑇1 = 1.141 𝑠𝑒𝑐 𝑎𝑛𝑑 2𝑇𝑐 = 0.6
1.141 sec≤ 0.6sec…………………not ok
Then λ =1

5.3.2 The total mass of the building

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 3.2.4
The inertial effects of the design seismic action shall be evaluated by taking into
account the presence of the masses associated with all gravity loads appearing in the
following combination of actions:
∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + ∑ 𝜓𝐸,𝑖 ∗ 𝑄𝑘,𝑖
Where

ψE,i is the combination coefficient for variable action

Gk,j Characteristic value of permanent action ,j

Qk,i Characteristic value of loading variable action ,I

The combination coefficient,𝜓𝐸,𝑖

𝜓𝐸,𝑖 = 𝜑 ∗ 𝜓2,𝑖

AAiT Page 86
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where

φ Is 0.8 for story with correlated occupancies and for category A building according to ES
EN 1998-1:2003 section 4.2.4 table 4.2, and

ψ2,i According to ES EN 1998-1:2003 section A1.2.2 table A1.1 for category A Building The
recommended value is 0.3.

Then 𝜓𝐸,𝑖 = 0.8 ∗ 0.3 = 0.24

Therefore ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + ∑ 0.24 ∗ 𝑄𝑘,𝑖

Table 5-2 Weight summery of typical floor and its mass center

item Total weight(kN) mass center X(m) mass center Y(m) weight*x weight*y
G-1st 614.4 7.55 6.933 4638.72 4259.635

column 2nd-5th 345.6 7.55 6.933 2609.28 2396.04

beam - 352.605 7.53 6.834 2655.11565 2409.703

floor finish - 38.432 7.547 6.432 290.046304 247.1946
plastering - 56.813 7.547 6.432 428.767711 365.4212
Slab - 650.531 7.516 6.403 4889.390996 4165.35
stair case - 57.927 7.053 11.67 408.559131 676.0081
shear wall - 89.6 7.33 11.164 656.768 1000.294
wall and
partition - 569.78 6.588 7.28 3934.48536 4347.762
wall
live load - 80.21 7.547 6.432 605.34487 515.9107
cement
- 100.3 7.547 6.432 870.146459 741.5903
screed
Total - 2653.035 - - 19377.34448 18728.87
G-1st 7.30 7.05
2nd-5th 7.28 7.07
Mass center of floor (m)

AAiT Page 87
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 5-3 Weight summery of roof and its mass center

Total
item mass(KN mass center X(m) mass center Y(m) weight*x weight*y
7.55 6.983 1321.25 1222.02
top tie beam 175
7.55 6.56 1949.63 1693.98
roof load 258.23
3270.88 2916.01
Total 433.23

mass center of roof(m) 7.55 6.73

Table 5-4 Summary of strorey weight with their mass center

storey weight(kN) mass center X(m) mass center Y(m)

GROUND 967.05 7.30 7.05

1ST 2610.598 7.30 7.05

2nd 2341.798 7.28 7.07

3rd 2341.798 7.28 7.07

4th 2341.798 7.28 7.07

5th 2341.798 7.28 7.07

Total 24511.033

AAiT Page 88
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
From the above Table 5-4 the total weight of the building is 24,511.033 kN.
3
mass of the building, 𝑚 = 24511.033 ∗ 10 𝑁 = 2,498,573 𝑘𝑔
9.81 𝑚⁄
𝑠2
The base shear force, 𝐹𝑏 = 𝑆𝑑(𝑇1). 𝑚. 𝜆
Where

Sd(T1). 0.358𝑚⁄
𝑠2
m 2,498,573 𝑘𝑔
λ 1

Fb =0.358 𝑚⁄𝑠2 ∗ 2,498,573 𝑘𝑔 ∗ 1 = 894.49 𝐾𝑁

5.4 Distribution of horizontal seismic force

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.3.2.3 when the fundamental mode shape is
approximated by horizontal displacements increasing linearly along the height, the horizontal
forces 𝐹𝑖 should be taken as being given by:

𝐹𝑖 = 𝐹𝑏 ∗ 𝑍 𝑖𝑚 𝑖
∑ 𝑍𝑗𝑚 𝑗

Where

mi, mj Are the story mass computed in accordance to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 3.2.4
Z i, Z j Are the heights of the masses 𝑚𝑖 , 𝑚𝑗 above the level of application of the seismic
action (foundation or top of a rigid basement).
Table 5-5 Distribution of seismic force

weight height
storey (kN) (m) weight*height (weight*height)/∑(weight*height) 𝐹𝑏 (kN) 𝐹𝑖 (kN)
967.05 2.5 2417.625 0.005111752 894.49 4.572410792
Ground
2610.598 5.7 14880.4086 0.031462677 894.49 28.14304984
1st
2341.798 8.9 20842.0022 0.044067686 894.49 39.41810487
2nd
2341.798 12.1 28335.7558 0.059912248 894.49 53.59090662
3rd
2341.798 15.3 35829.5094 0.075756809 894.49 67.76370838
4th
2341.798 18.5 43323.263 0.091601371 894.49 81.93651013
5th

AAiT Page 89
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

433.23 37.7 16332.771 0.034533507 894.49 30.8898768

Roof
∑(weight*height) 472954.3089

AAiT Page 90
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 6: Frame Analysis

A frame system is a structural system in which both the vertical and lateral loads are mainly
resisted by spatial frames whose shear resistance at the building base exceeds 65 % of the total
shear resistance of the whole structural system. A minimum torsional rigidity should also be
provided. This chapter entails the 3D modeling of the structure using ETABS V16.1.0. The
modeling is based on the loads obtained from chapters 2, 3, 4 and 5 also including the frame system
of the building.

6.1 Accidental torsional effects

According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.2 in order to account for un certainties in the location
of masses and in the spatial variation of the seismic motion ,the calculated center of mass at each
floor 𝑖 shall be considered as being displaced from its nominal location in each direction by an
accidental eccentricity:
𝑒𝑎𝑖 = ±0.05 ∗ 𝐿𝑖
Where

𝑒𝑎𝑖 is the accidental eccentricity of storey mass 𝑖 from its nominal location, applied in the
direction at all floors; and

𝐿𝑖 is the floor dimension perpendicular to the direction of the seismic action.

𝐿𝑖𝑥 = 15𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑𝐿𝑖𝑦 = 13.5𝑚 than, 𝑒𝑎𝑖𝑥 = ±0.75𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑒𝑎𝑖𝑦 = ±0.675𝑚
Table 6-1 Accidental eccentricity

Storey Center of mass Displaced center of mass

X(m) Y(m) X- (m) X+ (m) Y- (m) Y+ (m)

Ground – 5th floor 7.304 7.059 6.554 8.054 6.384 7.734

Roof 7.55 6.78 6.8 8.3 6.105 7.455

6.2 Stiffness modifiers

Stiffness modifiers are used to account for the cracking of reinforced concrete sections. In the
absence of stiffness modifiers, the structure would be stiffer and thus attract higher lateral forces
due to earthquake. Henceforth, the outcome may be a heavily reinforced shear walls, moment
frames etc. At the same time, under estimation of the drift may occur.

AAiT Page 91
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.3.1 Unless a more accurate analysis of the cracked
elements is performed, the elastic flexural and shear stiffness properties of concrete and masonry
elements may be taken to be equal to one-half of the corresponding stiffness of the un cracked
elements.
Shear area in X-direction = 0.5
Shear area in Y-direction = 0.5
Moment of inertia about X-direction = 0.5
Moment of inertia about Y-direction = 0.5
Torsion constant = 0.1

6.3 Load combination

The design load combinations are used for determining the various combinations of load cases for
which the structure needs to be designed. The load combination factors are applied to the forces
obtained from the associated load cases and are summed to obtain the factored load design forces.
Therefore, based on ES EN 1990:2015 section 6.4.3.2 and 6.4.3.4 and ES EN 1992-1-1:2015
section 5.2 (geometric imperfection) the following combinations are obtained:
Serviceability limit state
1. 𝐸𝑑 = ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝑄𝑘,1 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑖 + 𝑄𝑘,1

Ultimate limit state

2. 𝐸𝑑 = 1.35𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 1.5𝑄𝑘,1

Seismic load combination for lateral load method of analysis with geometric imperfection
Seismic actin 𝐸𝑑 = ∑ 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 𝛾1𝐴𝐸𝑘 + ∑ 𝛹2,𝑖𝑄𝑘,𝑖
3. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

4. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

5. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

6. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

7. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

8. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

9. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

AAiT Page 92
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

10. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

11. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

12. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

13. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

14. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

15. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

16. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

17. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

18. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

19. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

20. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

21. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

22. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

23. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

24. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

25. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

26. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

27. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

28. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

AAiT Page 93
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
29. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

30. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

31. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

32. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

33. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

34. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

35. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

36. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

37. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

38. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

39. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

40. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

41. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

42. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

43. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

44. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

45. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

46. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

47. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

48. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

AAiT Page 94
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
49. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

50. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

51. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

52. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

53. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

54. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

55. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

56. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

57. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

58. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

59. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

60. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

61. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

62. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

63. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

64. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

65. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

66. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

67. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

68. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

AAiT Page 95
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
69. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

70. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

71. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

72. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

73. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

74. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

75. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

76. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

77. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

78. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

79. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

80. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

81. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

82. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

83. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

84. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

85. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

86. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

87. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

88. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

AAiT Page 96
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
89. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

90. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

91. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

92. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

93. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

94. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

95. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

96. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

97. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

98. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌+ − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

99. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

100. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

101. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

102. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

103. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

104. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

105. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

106. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

107. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

108. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

AAiT Page 97
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
109. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

110. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

111. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

112. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

113. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

114. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

115. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

116. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

117. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

118. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 − 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

119. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

120. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

121. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

122. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋+ + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

123. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

124. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

125. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

126. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− + 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

127. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

128. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑋

AAiT Page 98
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
129. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− − 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

130. 𝐸𝑑 = 𝐺𝑘,𝑗 + 0.3𝑄𝑘,𝑖 + 𝐸𝑄𝑌− − 0.3𝐸𝑄𝑋− + 𝐼𝑀𝑃𝑌

Where

EQX± is the seismic action in the X-direction;

EQY± is the seismic action in the Y-direction;

IMPX is the imperfection factor in the X-direction; and

IMPY is the imperfection factor in the Y-direction.

6.4 Geometric imperfection

Geometric imperfection is the buckling or deviation of the structure laterally due to the loads
applied on it. This occurs on structures that have thin wall structures, that are steel structures,
structures that are not laterally braced, and structures that are highly susceptible to buckling. So,
these loads must be taken into account in designing a certain building because they affect the
stability of the structure. Buildings such as this type are subjected to loads that result the lateral
buckling of the building since they are subjected to cases such as geometric imperfection in their
construction as well as the effect resulting from the frame actions that make the building to have a
sway system and result the buckling.
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 5.2, The unfavourable effects of possible deviations
in the geometry of the structure and the position of loads shall be taken into account in the analysis
of members and structures. Imperfections shall be taken into account in ultimate limit states in
persistent and accidental design situations and need not be considered for serviceability limit
states.
The imperfection may be represented by an inclination,𝜃𝑖,given by
𝜃𝑖 = 𝜃0 ∗ 𝛼𝑛 ∗ 𝛼𝑚
Where

𝜃0 is the basic value, recommended value is 1/200;

𝛼𝑛 is the reduction factor for height; 𝛼𝑛 = 2⁄ ; 2/3 ≤ 𝛼𝑛 ≤ 1

√𝑙
𝛼𝑚 Is the reduction factor for number of member;
𝛼𝑚 = √0.5 ∗ (1 + 1/𝑚)

AAiT Page 99
Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

𝑙 Is the length or height(m), and

𝑚 Is the number of vertical members contribution to the total effect.

the definition of 𝑙 and 𝑚 depends on the effect considered, for which three main cases can be
distinguished (see also Figure 6-1):

• Effect on isolated member: 𝑙 = actual length of member, 𝑚 =1.

• Effect on bracing system: 𝑙 = height of building, 𝑚 = number of vertical

members contributing to the horizontal force on the bracing system.
• Effect on floor or roof diaphragms distributing the horizontal loads: 𝑙 = storey height, 𝑚 =
number of vertical elements in the storey(s) contributing to the total horizontal force on the
floor.

Figure 6-1Examples of geometric imperfection

AAiT Page 100

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
For Effect on bracing system, 𝑙 = 35.2𝑚 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝑚 = 12(𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝑜𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛𝑠)
2 2
𝛼 = 2⁄ = 2⁄ = 0.337 𝑏𝑢𝑡 ≤ 𝛼 ≤ 1 𝑎𝑛𝑑 𝛼 = = 0.667
𝑛 𝑛 𝑛
√𝑙 √35.2𝑚 3 3

1
𝛼𝑚 = √0.5 ∗ (1 + 1/𝑚) = √0.5 ∗ (1 + ) = 0.735
12

𝜃𝑖 = 1 ∗ 0.667 ∗ 0.735 = 0.00245

200

For structures, the effect of the inclination 𝜃𝑖may be represented by transverse forces, to be
included in the analysis together with other actions.
Effect on bracing system, (see Figure 6-1b)
𝐻𝑖 = 𝜃𝑖 ∗ (𝑁𝑏 − 𝑁𝑎)
Effect on floor diaphragm, (see Figure 6-1c)
(𝑁𝑏 + 𝑁𝑎)⁄
𝐻𝑖 = 𝜃𝑖 ∗ 2
Effect on roof diaphragm, (see Figure 6-1d)
𝐻𝑖 = 𝜃𝑖 ∗ 𝑁𝑎
Where

𝑁𝑏, 𝑁𝑎 are vertical forces contributing to 𝐻𝑖

Table 6-2 Transverse forces due to geometric imperfection

storeys load combination location P(kN) 𝜃𝑖 𝑁𝑏 − 𝑁𝑎 𝐻𝑖(kN)

ROOF Comb2:SLS Bottom 467.6919 0.00245 467.692 1.14585
5TH FLOOR Comb2:SLS Bottom 18649.03 0.00245 3088.75 7.56743
4TH FLOOR Comb2:SLS Bottom 21756.92 0.00245 3107.89 7.61434
3RD FLOOR Comb2:SLS Bottom 24874.39 0.00245 3117.46 7.63779
2ND FLOOR Comb2:SLS Bottom 28214.54 0.00245 3340.15 8.18336
1ST FLOOR Comb2:SLS Bottom 31554.68 0.00245 3340.15 8.18336
GROUND
FLOOR Comb2:SLS Bottom 34664.25 0.00245 3109.57 7.61844

AAiT Page 101

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

6.5 Safety verification

6.5.1 Ultimate limit state
According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.4.2 (2) Second-order effects (P-∆ effects) need not be
taken into account if the following condition is fulfilled in all storeys:
𝑃𝑡𝑜𝑡∗𝑑𝑟
𝜃= ≤ 0.1
𝑉𝑡𝑜𝑡∗ℎ

Where

𝜃 is the interstorey drift sensitivity coefficient;

𝑃𝑡𝑜𝑡 is the total gravity load at and above the storey considered in the seismic design situation;

𝑑𝑟 is the design interstorey drift, evaluated as the difference of the average lateral
displacement 𝑑𝑠 at the top and bottom of the storey under consideration and calculated
in accordance ES EN 1991-1:2015 section 4.3.4;

𝑉𝑡𝑜𝑡 is the total seismic storey shear; and

ℎ is the interstorey height.

• If 𝜃 ≤ 0.1 no need to consider second order effect (non-sway frame)

• If 0.1 ≤ 𝜃 ≤ 0.2, the second-order effects may approximately be taken into

account by multiplying the relevant seismic action effects by a factor equal to
1⁄
(1 − 𝜃).

• If 𝜃 > 0.2 unstable frame and 𝜃 shall not exceed 0.3.

According to ES EN 1991-1:2015 section 4.3.4

𝑑𝑠 = 𝑞𝑑 ∗ 𝑑𝑒
Where

𝑑𝑠 is the displacement of a point the structural system induced by the design seismic action;

𝑞𝑑 is the displacement behavior factor, assumed equal to 𝑞 unless otherwise specified; and

AAiT Page 102

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

𝑑𝑒 is the displacement of the same point of the structural system, as determined by a linear
analysis based on the design response spectrum.

Sample calculation of Inter-storey drift sensitivity coefficient

For Roof
𝑑𝑟 𝑑𝑒
𝜃=
𝑃𝑡𝑜𝑡∗𝑑𝑟 ,Where = ∗ 𝑞 , then
𝑉𝑡𝑜𝑡∗ℎ ℎ ℎ 𝑑

𝑑𝑒
= 0.0010 from output of ETABS
ℎ

𝑞𝑑 = 1.5 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑙𝑜𝑤 𝑑𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑖𝑡𝑦 𝑐𝑙𝑎𝑠𝑠

𝑑𝑟
Then = 0.0010 ∗ 1.5 = 0.0016
ℎ

𝑃𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 467.69𝑘𝑁 output of ETABS

𝑉𝑡𝑜𝑡 = 30.89𝑘𝑁 output of ETABS
𝜃 = 0.02 < 0.1 𝑛𝑜𝑛 𝑠𝑤𝑎𝑦
Table 6-3 Interstorey drift coefficient
𝑑𝑒
Story Load combo 𝑃𝑡𝑜𝑡(kN) 𝑉𝑡𝑜𝑡(kN) Direction Drift( ) q 𝑑𝑟 𝜃 stability
ℎ
ℎ
ROOF Comb16 467.69 30.89 X 0.0010 1.5 0.0016 0.02 non-
sway
5TH Comb16 16759.19 701 X 0.0019 1.5 0.0029 0.07 non-
FLOOR sway
4TH Comb16 19552.11 768.76 X 0.0020 1.5 0.0030 0.08 non-
FLOOR sway
3RD Comb16 22354.61 822.35 X 0.0020 1.5 0.0030 0.08 non-
FLOOR sway
2ND Comb16 25379.78 861.77 X 0.0016 1.5 0.0025 0.07 non-
FLOOR sway
1ST Comb16 28404.9567 889.91 X 0.0013 1.5 0.0019 0.06 non-
FLOOR sway
GROUND Comb16 31213.2938 894.48 X 0.0005 1.5 0.0008 0.028 non-
FLOOR sway

AAiT Page 103

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

6.5.2 Damage limitation requirement

6.5.2.1 Limitation of interstorey drift
According to ES EN 1998-1:2015 section 4.4.3.2
• for buildings having non-structural elements of brittle materials attached to the structure:
𝑑𝑟 ∗ 𝑣 ≤ 0.005ℎ;

• for buildings having ductile non-structural elements:

𝑑𝑟 ∗ 𝑣 ≤ 0.0075ℎ;

• for buildings having non-structural elements fixed in a way so as not to interfere with
structural deformations, or without non-structural elements:

𝑑𝑟 ∗ 𝑣 ≤ 0.01ℎ .

Where

𝑣 is the reduction factor which takes into account the lower period of the seismic action
associated with the damage limitation requirement.

The value of the reduction factor 𝑣 may also depend on the importance class of the building.

The recommended values of V are:

• 𝑣 = 0.4 for importance classes III and IV and

• 𝑣 = 0.5 for importance classes I and II.

Sample calculation for Damage limitation requirement

For Roof

Here it is assumed that the buildings having a non-structural elements of brittle materials attached
to the structure, then
𝑑𝑟∗𝑣
𝑑𝑟 ∗ 𝑣 ≤ 0.005ℎ , ≤ 0.005
ℎ

AAiT Page 104

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑑𝑟
Where = 0.0010 ∗ 1.5 = 0.0016
ℎ

𝑣 = 0.5 (for building of importance class II)

𝑑𝑟∗𝑣
= 0.0016 ∗ 0.5 = 0.00078 < 0.005 … … … … … … … . 𝑜𝑘
ℎ

Table 6-4 Damage limitation requirement

maximum
q dr/h V drV/h remark
Storey Load Combo Drift value
ROOF Comb16 0.0010 1.5 0.0016 0.5 0.00078 0.005 ok
5TH
1.5
FLOOR Comb16 0.0019 0.0029 0.5 0.00145 0.005 ok
4TH
1.5
FLOOR Comb16 0.0020 0.0030 0.5 0.00149 0.005 ok
3RD
1.5
FLOOR Comb16 0.0020 0.0030 0.5 0.00148 0.005 ok
2ND
1.5
FLOOR Comb16 0.0016 0.0025 0.5 0.00123 0.005 ok
1ST
1.5
FLOOR Comb16 0.0013 0.0019 0.5 0.00096 0.005 ok
GROUND
1.5
FLOOR Comb16 0.0005 0.0008 0.5 0.00041 0.005 ok

AAiT Page 105

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 7: Beam Analysis and Design

7.1 Introduction
A beam is a structural element that is capable of withstanding load primarily by resisting bending.
The bending force induced into the material of the beam as result of the external loads, own weight,
span and external reactions to these loads is called bending moment. Beams are structural members
that transfer the load by developing moment and shear force. Is axial forces are developed in the
beam, then it is no longer a beam but designed as beam column. Beams are usually horizontal.
When beams are curved in elevation, they are known as arch beams. Arch beams are not
technically beams because they only carry compression force. Since arch beams do not carry
bending moments. They have no deflection, hence having small beams.
Reinforced concrete beam analysis and design consists primarily of producing member details
which will adequately resist the ultimate bending moments, shear forces and also torsional
moments if necessary. At the same time serviceability requirements must be considered to ensure
that the member will behave satisfactorily under working loads. It is difficult to separate these two
criteria; hence the design procedure consists of a series of interrelated steps and checks. These
steps may be condensed into three basic design stages which are preliminary analysis and member
sizing, detailed analysis and design of reinforcement and serviceability calculations. The materials
in the design of beams depends on the theory and design specification of concrete and
reinforcement described in chapter one section 1.6 of this document. And the design of beams is
in accordance with ES EN 1992-1.1:2015.

7.1.1 Basic principles and assumptions

Although the method used in the analysis and design of reinforced concrete beams are different
from those used in the design of homogenous beams such as structural steel, the fundamental
principles are essentially the same. Accordingly, the basic equations for flexural design of beams
are derived based on the following basic principles and assumptions at ultimate limit state
described on ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 6.1(2) P.
1. Internal stress resultants such as bending moments, shear forces etc. at any section of the
member are in equilibrium with the external action effects.
2. Plane sections before bending remains plane after bending.
3. The strain in bonded reinforcement or bonded prestressing tendons, whether in tension or
in compression, is the same as that in the surrounding concrete.
4. The tensile strength of concrete is ignored.
5. The stresses in the concrete in compression are derived from the design stress/strain
relationship given in ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 3.1.7 stress-strain relations for the
design of cross-sections.

AAiT Page 106

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 7-1 possible Strain diagram at Ultimate Limit State ES EN-1992-1.1:2015 Figure 6.1

7.2 Preliminary analysis and beam sizing

The layout and size of members are very often controlled by architectural details and clearances
for machinery and equipment. Therefore, it is necessary to either check that beam sizes are
adequate to carry the loading, or alternatively, decide on the sizes that are adequate. The
preliminary analysis need only provide the maximum moments and shears in order to ascertain
reasonable dimensions. Beam dimensions required are: -
1. Cover to the reinforcement
2. Breadth (b)
3. Effective depth (d)
4. Overall depth (h)

7.2.1 Design for cover

The recommended procedure for the determination of the nominal concrete cover is the same as
the procedure used for slab in chapter 2 section 2.2.2 of this document. The only difference is that,
nominal concrete cover for beam sections is designed for both the longitudinal reinforcement and
the shear reinforcement (stirrup). Then the governing nominal concrete cover is the minimum
nominal concrete cover found by comparing the longitudinal and shear reinforcement (stirrup)
nominal concrete cover.
At it has been described in chapter 2 section 2.2.2 of this document, the nominal concrete cover is
designed to meet requirements of durability, bond and fire resistance according to ES EN 1992-
1.1:2015 section 4.4.1 and ES EN 1992-1.2:2015 section 5.6, therefore the nominal concrete cover
for the beam is designed for a design service life of 50 years, normal quality control, maximum
aggregate size of 20mm, 1HR fire resistance and exposure class of XC1 (dry or permanently wet)
as follows.
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑏𝑜𝑛𝑑
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛, 𝑑𝑢𝑟
10𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 107

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Cmin, bond for the longitudinal reinforcement and shear reinforcement is equal to the diameter of
the longitudinal reinforcement and the shear reinforcement respectively. The longitudinal and
shear reinforcement we used in this project are Ø16mm and Ø8mm respectively. Therefore
Cmin, bond for the longitudinal reinforcement and shear reinforcement is 16mm and 8mm.
Cmin, dur, according to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 table 4.4N, for a structural class of four and
exposure XC1 (dry or permanently wet). The minimum concrete cover is 15mm. this applies for
both longitudinal and shear reinforcements.
16𝑚𝑚
Longitudinal reinforcement, 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 15𝑚𝑚
10𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 16𝑚𝑚, allowing for in design deviation, ∆c,dev=10mm
The nominal concrete cover, 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 𝑐𝑚𝑖𝑛 + ∆𝑐𝑑𝑒𝑣 = 16𝑚𝑚 + 10𝑚𝑚 = 26𝑚𝑚
8𝑚𝑚
Shear reinforcement, 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 15𝑚𝑚
10𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 15𝑚𝑚, allowing for in design deviation, ∆c,dev=10mm
The nominal concrete cover, 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 𝑐𝑚𝑖𝑛 + ∆𝑐𝑑𝑒𝑣 = 15𝑚𝑚 + 10𝑚𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚 It can be
seen from the above calculation that the nominal concrete cover for the shear reinforcement
governs. Therefor the provided nominal cover for our beam is, 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚.
7.2.1.1 Check for fire resistance
According to ES EN 1992-1.2:2015 table 5.6 for standard fire resistance of R60, the recommended
bmin =200mm and a (nominal cover) =12mm. therefore the nominal concrete cover, Cnom
=25mm provided is also satisfactory for R60 fire resistance.

7.2.2 Depth and width

As it has been mentioned in section 2.2.3 of this document, the minimum depth of the slab should
satisfy for the serviceability requirement in accordance with ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 7.4. the
deformation of a beam member should be in way that does not affect its appearance and
functionality. This can be checked by limiting the span/depth ratio, according to the ES EN 1992-
1-1:2015 expression (7.16a) on the Table 7-1 below.
Table 7-1 Effective depth calculation
l(mm) ρ(slightly stressed) l/d d (mm)
Beam span ρ0 (√𝑓𝑐𝑘 ∗ 10−3) k Check

AB 3760 0.5% 0.5% 1.3 Ok 30 125

AAiT Page 108

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

BC 4080 0.5% 0.5% 1.5 Ok 35 116

CD 3760 0.5% 0.5% 1.3 Ok 20 125

DE 3527 0.5% 0.5% 1.3 OK 20 120

Required depth (H) = 125mm+16mm/2+25mm+8mm = 166mm

Provided depth (H) = 550mm > 166mm.……………………………. ok
Required minimum width for fire resistance (W) = 200mm
Provided width(W) = 300mm > 200mm……………………………. ok

7.3 Analysis of beam section (bending moment and shear force)

Based on the modeling and analysis of the building on ETAB’S 2016 V16.1.0 for a total of 132
load combinations, the maximum bending moment and shear force determined are shown below
for a beam on axis 2 of 3rd floor beams.

Figure 7-2 Shear force and bending moment diagram for beam on axis 2

AAiT Page 109

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

7.4 Design of beam section for ultimate limit state

During construction operation of beams, concrete is placed in the beams and slabs in a monolithic
pour. As a result, the slab serves as the top flange of the beams, as indicated by the shading in

AAiT Page 110

 Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Figure 7-3. such a beam is can be either a T beam or an inverted L beam depending whether the
beam is an interior beam which has flange on both sides or an exterior beam which has flange on
one side only.

Figure 7-3 T beams and inverted L beams

7.4.1 Effective width of flange

The typical beam section on axis 2 of 3rd floor beams is an interior T beam which means that it
will have flanges on both sides. In T beams the effective flange width, over which uniform
conditions of stress can be assumed, depends on the web and flange dimensions, the type of
loading, the span, the support conditions and traverse reinforcement (ES EN 1992-1.2:2015 section
5.3.2.1(1) P.
According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 5.3.2.1(1) P, the effective width of a flange should be
based on the distance lo between points of zero moments, which are obtained from ES EN 1992-
1.1:2015 figure 5.2.

Figure 7-4 Definition of l, for calculation of flange width

The effective flange width with beff for a T beam is driven by ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 expression
5.7: -

𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓 = ∑ 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 𝑖 + 𝑏𝑤 ≤ 𝑏

Where

𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 𝑖 = 0.2𝑏𝑖 + 0.1𝑙𝑜 ≤ 0.2𝑙𝑜 and

𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 𝑖 ≤ 𝑏𝑖

AAiT Page 110

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 7-5 Effective flange width parameters

𝑙𝑜 = 0.85𝑙1 = 0.85 ∗ 3.76 = 3.196m for span AB and CD

𝑙𝑜 = 0.15(𝑙1 + 𝑙2) = 0.15 ∗ (3.76 + 4.08) = 1.176m for support B and C
𝑙𝑜 = 0.7𝑙2 = 0.7 ∗ 4.08 = 2.856m for span BC
For span AB and CD
5.9 − 0.3
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 1 = 0.2 ( ) + 0.1 ∗ 3.196 ≤ 0.2 ∗ 3.196𝑚
2
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 1 = 0.8796𝑚 ≤ 0.6392𝑚 not ok, then
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 1 = 0.6392𝑚, 𝑏𝑢𝑡 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 1 ≤ 𝑏1 = 2.8𝑚 ok, then
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 1 = 0.6392𝑚 = 638.2𝑚𝑚
6.3 − 0.3
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 2 = 0.2 ( ) + 0.1 ∗ 3.196 ≤ 0.2 ∗ 3.196𝑚
2
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 2 = 0.9196 ≤ 0.6392𝑚 not ok, then
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 2 = 0.6392𝑚, 𝑏𝑢𝑡 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 2 ≤ 𝑏2 = 3𝑚 ok, then
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 2 = 0.6392𝑚 = 638.2𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 1 + 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓, 2 + 𝑏𝑤 ≤ 𝑏
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 638.2𝑚𝑚 + 638.2𝑚𝑚 + 300𝑚𝑚 ≤ 2800𝑚𝑚 + 3000𝑚𝑚 + 300𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 1580𝑚𝑚 ≤ 6100𝑚𝑚 ok, then
𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 1580𝑚𝑚
For span BC and supports B and C the same procedure is applied to determine the effective flange
width. As result the effective flange width for span BC is, beff = 1440mm and for the supports B
and C, beff = 700mm.

AAiT Page 111

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
7.4.2 Design for flexure
At the ultimate limit state, it is important that member sections in flexure should be ductile and
that failure should occur with the gradual yielding of the tension steel and not by a sudden
catastrophic compression failure of the concrete. Also, yielding of the reinforcement enables the
formation of plastic hinges so that redistribution of maximum moments can occur, resulting in a
safer and more economical structure. To ensure that a beam member is ductile enough, the ratio of
the neutral axis to effective depth (x/d) should not be greater than 0.45m for concrete grades C50
or below. If the ratio of neutral axis to effective depth (x/d) greater than 0.45, then the member
should be resized by increasing depth or width of the member and also be providing a compression
reinforcement in the case of beams in addition to the tensile reinforcement.
For T beams and inverted L beams, when the beams are resisting sagging moments, the slab acts
as a compression flange and the members may be designed as T or L beams or as rectangular
beams depending on the position of the neutral axis. If the neutral axis is within the flange depth,
then the T or L beam is designed as rectangular beam. But if the neutral axis is beyond the flange
width then they are designed as T or L beams using rectangular stress-strain distribution curve.

Support moment A on axis 2

Design moment, Msd = 135.19 KNm
Tensile reinforcement bar, ∅ = 16mm
Reinforcement bar for compression, ∅ = 14mm
Effective depth, d = 550mm – 25mm – 8mm – 16/2mm = 509mm
Effective width, beff = 1580mm

Effective web, bw = 300mm

Rectangular beam section is considered because it is at the support. But according to ES EN 1992-
1.1:2015 section 9.2.1.2(2) an intermediate supports of continuous beams, the total area of tension
reinforcement As1 can be spread over the effective width of the flange and part of it may be placed
on the web. But this may not be necessary if the width of the web is enough to place the tensile
reinforcement with adequate spacing.
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 𝑀𝑠𝑑/(𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑2).
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = (135.19 ∗ 10^6𝑁𝑚𝑚)/(14.167𝑁/𝑚𝑚2 ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ (509𝑚𝑚)2).
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 0.054 ≤ 0.295
This indicates that the section is designed as singly reinforced beam.
Kz = 0.932
z = 0.932d = 0.919*509mm = 474.388mm

AAiT Page 112

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑀𝑠𝑑
𝐴𝑠1 =
𝑓𝑦𝑑∗𝑍
𝑁
𝐴𝑠1 = 135.19 ∗ 106 ∗ 𝑁𝑚𝑚/(347.83 ∗ 474.38𝑚𝑚)= 819.3mm2
𝑚𝑚2

Check for maximum and minimum reinforcement limits

0.26∗𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚∗𝑏𝑡∗𝑑
Minimum reinforcement, 𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑘
0.0013𝑏𝑡 ∗ 𝑑
𝑁
0.26 ∗ 2.6 ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚
𝑚𝑚2 = 258.063𝑚𝑚2
𝑁
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 400
𝑚𝑚2
{ 0.0013 ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚 = 198.51𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 258.063 mm2 < As1 = 819.3mm2…………………………………… ok

𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04𝐴𝐶 = 0.04*300mm*550mm

𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6600𝑚𝑚2 > 𝐴𝑠1 = 819.3mm2………………………………………….. ok

Therefore 𝐴𝑠1 = 819.3mm2

𝐴𝑠1 819.3
Number of bars in tension, n = = = 4.1
𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝜋∗162/4

Provide 5∅16 tensile reinforcement

Check for longitudinal reinforcement spacing
According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 8.2(1) P, the spacing of bars shall be in such that
concrete can be placed and compacted satisfactory for the development of adequate bond. The
clear distance between individual parallel or horizontal layers of parallel bars should not be less
than the maximum of k1 *bar diameter, (dg +k2) or 20mm where dg is the maximum size of
aggregate (in our case 20mm). the recommended value of k1 and k2 are 1 and 5mm respectively.
Spacing required = max (1*16mm, 20mm+5mm, 20mm)
Spacing required = max (16mm, 25mm, 20mm)

Spacing required = 25mm

Spacing available = (300mm-2*25mm-2*8mm-5*16mm)/4
Spacing available =40mm > Spacing required = 25mm……………………………………..ok
Span moment AB on axis 2
Design moment, Msd = 35.9011 KNm
Tensile reinforcement bar, ∅ = 16mm
Reinforcement bar for compression, ∅ = 14mm

AAiT Page 113

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Effective depth, d = 550mm – 25mm – 8mm – 16/2mm = 509mm
Effective width, beff = 1440mm

Effective web, bw = 300mm

Since the beam at this span is resisting a sagging bending moment, the first thing to do is to check
whether the beam should be designed as rectangular or T beam. To do this we have to determine
the neutral axis using a simplified stress-strain distribution called rectangular stress-strain
distribution curve as shown in Error! Reference source not found..

Figure 7-6 Rectangular stress-strain block

𝑀𝑠𝑑 = 0.8𝑥 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∗ (𝑑 − 0.4𝑥)

37.9011 ∗ 106 𝑁𝑚𝑚 = 0.8𝑥 ∗ 11.33 𝑁/〖𝑚𝑚〗^2 ∗ 1440𝑚𝑚 ∗ (509𝑚𝑚 − 0.4𝑥)

2.9 ∗ 103 = 509𝑥 – 0.4𝑥2

𝑥 = 5.72𝑚𝑚 < 𝑡𝑓 = 170𝑚𝑚, the beam is designed as a rectangular beam
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 𝑀𝑠𝑑/(𝑓𝑐𝑑 ∗ 𝑏 ∗ 𝑑2).
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = (37.9011 ∗ 10^6𝑁𝑚𝑚)/(14.167𝑁/𝑚𝑚2 ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ (509𝑚𝑚)2).
𝜇𝑠𝑑 = 0.034 ≤ 0.295
This indicates that the section is designed as singly reinforced beam.
𝐾𝑧 = 0.978
𝑧 = 0.978𝑑 = 0.978 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚 = 498.01𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑠1 = 37.9011 ∗ 〖10〗^6 ∗ 𝑁𝑚𝑚/(347.83 𝑁/(𝑚𝑚^2 ) ∗ 498.01𝑚𝑚) = 219.2𝑚𝑚2

Check for maximum and minimum reinforcement limits

𝐴_(𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛) = 258.063 𝑚𝑚^2 > 𝐴𝑠1 = 219.2𝑚𝑚2…………………………………not ok, therefore
𝐴𝑠1 = 𝐴𝑠, 𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 258.063 𝑚𝑚^2

AAiT Page 114

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 0.04𝐴𝐶 = 0.04*300mm*550mm

𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 6600𝑚𝑚2 > 𝐴𝑠1 = 258.063 𝑚𝑚2 ……………………………………….ok

Therefore 𝐴𝑠1 = 258.063 𝑚𝑚2

𝐴𝑠1 258.063
Number of bars in tension, N = = = 1.28
𝑎𝑠𝑡 𝜋∗162/4

Provide 2∅16 tensile reinforcement

Check for longitudinal reinforcement spacing
Spacing required = 25mm
Spacing available = (300mm-2*25mm-2*8mm-2*16mm)/1
Spacing available =202mm > Spacing required = 25mm………………………………. ok
Table 7-2 Summary design for flexure of beam on axis 2

spacing spacing Tensile

Beam position Msd,KNm d,mm Design type μsd Reinforcement type Kz Z,mm As1,mm2 2 check As1,mm2 N =As1/as check
As,min, mm required available reinforcement
span moment AB 35.396 509 Rectangular 0.032 Singly reinforced 0.979 498.41 204.17 258.063 Not ok 258.063 2 25 202 OK 2Ø16
span moment BC 37.9011 509 Rectangular 0.034 Singly reinforced 0.978 498.0.1 219.2 258.063 Not ok 258.063 2 25 202 OK 2Ø16
on span moment CD 33.509 509 Rectangular 0.03 Singly reinforced 0.98 498.82 193.13 258.063 Not ok 258.063 2 25 202 OK 2Ø16
Axis 2 support moment A 135.19 509 Rectangular 0.122 Singly reinforced 0.932 474.388 819.3 258.063 OK 819.3 5 25 40 OK 5Ø16
support moment B 135.94 509 Rectangular 0.123 Singly reinforced 0.932 474.489 823.67 258.063 OK 823.67 5 25 40 OK 5Ø16
support moment C 132.54 509 Rectangular 0.12 Singly reinforced 0.934 475.41 801.51 258.063 OK 801.51 5 25 57 OK 4Ø16
support moment D 134.49 509 Rectangular 0.122 Singly reinforced 0.933 474.75 814.43 258.063 OK 814.43 5 25 40 OK 5Ø16

7.4.3 Design for shear

When a beam is uniformly loaded the distribution of principal stress across the span of a
homogeneous concrete beam is as shown in Figure 7-7. The direction of the principal compressive
stresses takes the form of an arch, while the tensile stresses have the curve of catenary or suspended
chain. Towards the mid-span, where the shear is low and the bending stresses are dominant, the
direction of the stressed tends to be parallel to the beam axis. Near the supports, where the shearing
forces are greater, the principal stresses become inclined and the greater the shear force the greater
angle of inclination. The tensile stresses due to shear are liable to cause diagonal cracking of the
concrete near to the support so that shear reinforcement must be provided. This reinforcement is
either in the form of stirrups, or inclined bars (used in conjunction with stirrups)

AAiT Page 115

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 7-7 Principal stresses in beam

The concrete itself can resist shear by combination of the un-cracked concrete in the compression
zone, the dowelling action of the bending reinforcement and aggregate interlock across tension
cracks but, because concrete is weak in tension, the shear reinforcement is designed to resist all
the tensile stresses caused by the shear forces. Even where the shear forces are small near the center
of span of abeam a minimum amount of shear reinforcement in the form of links must be provided
in order to form a cage supporting the longitudinal reinforcement and to resist any tensile stress
due to factors such as thermal movement and shrinkage of concrete.
7.4.3.1 Members that don’t require shear reinforcement
Beams are generally heavily loaded and have a smaller cross-section do that they nearly are always
require shear reinforcement. Even lightly loaded beams are required to have a minimum amount
of shear links. According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 6.2.1(3), in regions of the members
where design shear force. VED ≤ VRD, c (design shear resistance of a member without shear
reinforcement) no calculated shear reinforcement is necessary. Nevertheless, when no shear
reinforcement is required, minimum shear reinforcement should nevertheless be provided
according to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 9.2.2.
7.4.3.2 Members that require shear reinforcement
According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 6.2.1(3), in regions of the members where design shear
force. VED > VRD, c (design shear resistance of a member without shear reinforcement) sufficient
calculated shear reinforcement is necessary so that VED ≤ VRD (design shear resistance of a member
with shear reinforcement). For beam members requiring design shear reinforcement, the design of
the beam members with shear reinforcement is based on a truss model shown in (ES EN 1992-
1.1:2015 section 6.2.3(1)) figure 6.5, which is shown in Figure 7-8 in this document. In Figure 6.5
the following notations are shown:

α is the angle between shear reinforcement and the main tension chord (measured positive as
shown);

td is the design value of the tensile force in the longitudinal reinforcement;

θ is the angle between concrete compression struts and the main tension chord F;

AAiT Page 116

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Fcd is the design value of the concrete compression force in the direction of the longitudinal
member axis;

bw is the minimum width between tension and compression chords; and

z is the inner lever arm, for a member with constant depth, corresponding to the maximum
bending moment in the element under consideration. In the shear analysis, the approximate
value z = 0,9d may normally be used

Figure 7-8 Truss model and notation for shear reinforced members
The angle θ increases with the magnitude of the maximum shear force on the beam and hence the
compressive forces in the diagonal concrete members. But in ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section, the
angle θ is limited to have a value between 21.8 and 45 degrees. For most cases of predominantly
uniformly distributed loading the angle θ will be 21.8 degrees but for heavy and concentrated loads
it can be higher in order to resist crushing of concrete diagonal members.
Shear design of span AB axis 2
As mentioned in section 3.2.4 of this document, the design shear force for members predominantly
subjected to distributed loading should be determined at a distance d from the face of the support.
But for simplicity and due to shear force diagram in Figure 7-2 being as a result of envelop
combination, the shear force at the center of the supports has been taken as the design shear force.
VED = 128.32KN
COMPRESSION CAPACITY OF COMPRESSION STRUT, VRD, max, taking θ = 21.8 degrees
According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 6.2.1(6), the design shear force, VED, should not
exceed the maximum permitted value, VRD, max (is the design value of the maximum shear force
which can be sustained by the member, limited by crushing of the compression struts).
𝑓𝑐𝑘 25
𝑣1 = 0.6 (1 − ) = 0.6 (1 − ) = 0.54
250 250
fcd = 14.167Mpa

AAiT Page 117

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝛼𝑐𝑤 = 1 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑛𝑜𝑛 − 𝑝𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑒𝑠𝑠𝑒𝑑 𝑠𝑡𝑟𝑢𝑐𝑡𝑢𝑟𝑒𝑠
𝑧 = 0.9𝑑 = 0.9 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚 = 458.1𝑚𝑚
𝑏𝑤 = 300mm
1 ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ 458.1𝑚𝑚 ∗ 0.54 ∗ 14.167𝑁/𝑚𝑚2
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 =
(2.5 + 0.4)
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 362.52𝐾𝑁 > VED = 128.32KN ……………………………………. ok
SHEAR RESISTANCE OF CONCRETE, VRD, c
0.18 0.18
𝑐 = = = 0.12 𝑁/𝑚𝑚2
𝑅𝑑
𝛾𝑐 1.5

200
𝑘=1+√ = 1.39 ≤ 2.0 … … … … … … … … … … … … . 𝑜𝑘
509
𝐴𝑠
𝜌1 = ≤ 0.02
𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑑
258.063
𝜌1 = = 0.00169 ≤ 0.02 … … … … … … … … … … … … 𝑜𝑘
300
𝑁𝑒𝑑 ∗ 509
𝜎 = < 0.2𝑓 = 0……………………….because 𝑁 = 0
𝑐𝑝 𝐴𝑐 𝑐𝑑 𝑒𝑑

3 1
𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 𝑘2 ∗ 𝑓2𝑐𝑘
3
𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.035 ∗ 1.392 ∗ 250.5
𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 0.1282
1
[𝑐𝑅𝑑 ∗ 𝑘 ∗ (100 ∗ 𝜌1 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘)3 + 𝑘1 ∗ 𝜎𝑐𝑝] ∗ 𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑑
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
(𝑣𝑚𝑖𝑛 + 𝑘1 ∗ 𝜎𝑐𝑝) ∗ 𝑏𝑤 ∗ 𝑑

𝑁 1
[0.12 ∗ 1.39 ∗ (100 ∗ 0.00169 ∗ 25)3 + 1 ∗ 0] ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑚𝑚2
(0.1282 + 1 ∗ 0) ∗ 300𝑚𝑚 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚
41.17𝐾𝑁
𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 19.576𝐾𝑁

𝑉𝑅𝑑,𝑐 = 41.17 𝐾𝑁 > VED = 128.32KN, therefore shear reinforcement is required

AAiT Page 118

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
DIAMETER AND SPACING OF LINKS
Where VED > VRD, c, shear reinforcement is provided according to ES EN1992-1.1:2015
expression 6.8.

𝐴𝑠𝑤
𝑉 =𝑉 = ∗ 𝑧𝑓 𝑐𝑜𝑡 θ
𝑅𝐷,𝑠 𝐸𝐷 𝑦𝑤𝑑
𝑠

Where
Asw Is the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement;
s Is the spacing of stirrups; and
N
fywd Is the design yield strength of the shear reinforcement, 347.83
mm2

Using a shear reinforcement bar of diameter ∅8mm, Asw =2*π * 42 = 100.53mm2

𝑉𝐸𝐷 𝐴
⁄ = 𝑠𝑤
𝑧𝑓𝑦𝑤𝑑𝑐𝑜𝑡 𝜃 𝑠
𝐴𝑠𝑤
128.32 =
⁄ 347.83𝑁 𝑠
0.9 ∗ 509𝑚𝑚 ∗ ∗ 𝑐𝑜𝑡 21.8
𝑚𝑚2
𝐴𝑠𝑤
0.322 =
𝑠
𝑠 = 𝐴𝑠𝑤/0.322
𝑠 = 100.53/0.322
𝑠 = 300𝑚𝑚
According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 9.2.2(6), the maximum spacing between vertical shear
assemblies should not exceed, Sl, max. The recommended value is given by ES EN 1992-1.1:2015
expression 9.6N.
Smax = 0.75d
Smax = 0.75*509mm
Smax = 380mm > s=300mm……………………………………. ok
Therefore, provide ∅8 C/C 300mm

AAiT Page 119

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 7-3 summary shear design

Span VED VRD, Check VRD,C Check S (mm) Smax check provide
(KN) max (KN) (mm)
(KN)
AB 128.32 365.32 Ok 41.7 Requires shear 300 380 ok ∅8C/C300mm
reinforcement
BC 121.43 365.32 Ok 41.7 Requires shear 330 380 ok ∅8C/C330mm
reinforcement
CD 122.22 365.32 Ok 41.7 Requires shear 330 380 ok ∅8 C/C330mm
reinforcement

7.5 Design of beam section for serviceability limit state

7.5.1 Flexural crack control
The crack width is the difference between the steel and concrete elongations over the length(2lt),
where lt is the transmission length necessary to increase the concrete strength from 0 to the tensile
strength fctm Figure 7-9, the maximum distance between two cracks has to be 2lt otherwise a new
crack could occur in-between as show in Figure 7-9.
For the calculation of maximum crack width, the difference between steel and concrete elongation
has to be calculated for the largest crack distance 𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 2𝑙𝑡

Figure 7-9 Definition of crack width

AAiT Page 120

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
7.5.1.1 Flexural cracking
Members subject to bending generally exhibits series of flexural cracks, even at service loads.
These cracks are unobtrusive and harmless unless the width becomes excessive, in which case
appearance and durability suffer as the reinforcement is exposed to corrosion.
The actual width of cracks in reinforced concrete structures will vary between wide limits and
cannot be precisely estimated, thus the limiting requirement to be satisfied is that the probability
of the maximum width exceeding satisfactory value is small. The maximum acceptable value is
given in ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 table 7.1N depending on their exposure class.
7.5.1.2 Mechanism of flexural cracking
When the limiting tensile strain for the concrete is reached, a crack will form and the adjacent
tensile zone will no longer be acted on by the direct tension forces. The curvature of the beam,
however causes further direct tension stress to develop at some distance from the original crack to
maintain equilibrium. Thus in turn cause further cracks to form, and the process continues until
the distance between cracks does not permit sufficient tensile stress to develop and cause further
cracking. These initial cracks are called primary cracks, and the average spacing in a region of
constant moment is largely independent of reinforcement detailing.
As the applied moment is increased beyond this point the development of cracks is governed to a
large extent by the reinforcement. Tensile stresses in the concrete surrounding reinforcing bars are
caused by bond as the strain in the reinforcement increases. These stress increase with distance
from the primary cracks and May eventually causes further cracks to form approximately mid-way
between primary cracks.
7.5.1.3 Factors influencing the crack width

• Tensile stress in the steel bars

• Thickness of the concrete cover

• Diameter and spacing of the reinforcement bars

• Depth of member and location of neutral axis depth

• Bond strength and tensile strength of concrete.

7.5.1.4 Control of crack width
There are four fundamental ways in which crack widths may be reduced.

• Reduce the stress in the reinforcement(𝜎𝑠) which will reduce ɛ𝑠𝑚

• Reduce the bar diameters(𝜙) which will reduce the bar spacing and the effect
of reducing the crack spacing(𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥)

• Increase the effective reinforcement ratio (𝜌𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓)

AAiT Page 121

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
• Use high bond rather than plain bars.
7.5.1.5 Crack width estimation
First of all, the cracking of the section should be checked. In order to check whether the section
cracks or not we should have to determine the moment cracking and compare it with the moment
due to quasi-permanent load.
If 𝑀𝑐𝑟 ≤ 𝑀𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑠𝑖 − 𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑒𝑛𝑡 ……………...cracking will occur.
Steps that we have followed in order to determine the crack width are
1. Transform the reinforced beam section in to equivalent homogenous section.

2. Determine the centroid of the uncracked transformed cross-section.

3. Determine the moment of inertia of the uncracked transformed section.

4. Determine the cracking moment.

5. Check whether the beam cracks or not.

6. If the section has cracked calculate the neutral axis depth for fully cracked section.

7. Calculate the stress on the steel

8. Calculate ɛ𝑠𝑚 − ɛ𝑐𝑚

9. Determine the maximum spacing of cracks,𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥.

10. Calculate the crack width

11. Check against the limit

1. Transform the reinforced beam section in to equivalent homogenous section.

Figure 7-10 Equivalent homogenous section

AAiT Page 122

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
2. Centroid of the uncracked transformed section

Table 7-4 Centroid of the uncracked transformed section

part n Area(mm2) 𝑦̅(mm) Area*𝑦̅(mm3)
1 - 165,000 275 45,375,000
2 5 804.24 509 409358.16
3 2 201.06 41 8243.46
Σ 166,005.3 45,792,601.62

𝑦̅= 𝛴(𝐴𝑟𝑒𝑎 ∗ 𝑦̅)/𝛴𝐴

45,792,601.62𝑚𝑚3
𝑦̅ =
166005.3𝑚𝑚2
𝑦̅=275.85mm
3. Moment of inertia of the uncracked transformed section.
The uncracked moment of inertia is given by the equation
𝐼 = 𝛴𝐼̅ + 𝛴(𝐴 ∗ 𝑑2)
Table 7-5 uncracked moment of inertia
part Area(mm2) d(mm) 𝐼(mm4) A*d2
1 165,000 0.85 4,159,375,000 140250
2 804.24 274.85 - 60,754,318.3
3 201.06 234.85 - 11,089,368.29
Σ 4,159,375,000 71,843,686.59
4.23x109mm4

4. Cracking moment.

𝑀𝑐𝑟 = (𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑚 ∗ 𝐼)/𝑐

fctm = 2.6Mpa.

𝐼 = 4.23𝑥109𝑚𝑚4
c=275mm

𝑀𝑐𝑟 = (2.6 𝑁/𝑚𝑚2 ∗ 4.23x109mm4)/275𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 123

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Mcr=40.00KNm
5. Check whether the section has cracked.

𝑀𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑠𝑖−𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 47.23𝐾𝑁𝑚.

𝑀𝑐𝑟 = 40.0𝐾𝑁𝑚 < 𝑀𝑞𝑢𝑎𝑠𝑖−𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑚𝑎𝑛𝑒𝑛𝑡 = 47.23𝐾𝑁𝑚…...Therefore the section has cracked.

6. Calculate the neutral axis depth for fully cracked section.

by taking moment about the neutral axis of cracked section we can get the value of neutral axis
depth.
𝐸𝑠
𝛼𝑒 = ( 𝐸 )
𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓

𝐸𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝐸𝑐/(1 + ф)
2𝐴𝑐
ф = 𝑓( )
𝑢

Where
Es Is the modulus of elasticity of reinforcement bar,200Gpa,
Ec Is the modulus of elasticity of concrete,31Gpa,
ф Is creep coefficient,
Ec,eff Is the effective modulus of elasticity of concrete,
αe Is the ratio of Es and Ec,eff ,
Ac Is cross-sectional area of the beam,
u Is the perimeter of the beam

ф = 𝑓(2 ∗ 165,000𝑚𝑚2/1700𝑚𝑚)
ф = 𝑓(194.11)

ф ≈ 2.8
𝐸𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 31𝐺𝑝𝑎/(1 + 2.8) = 8.15

𝛼𝑒 = (200𝐺𝑝𝑎/8.15𝐺𝑝𝑎) = 24.54

AAiT Page 124

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Figure 7-11 Cracked section stress and strain distribution

by taking moment about the neutral axis of the cracked section we can get the value of neutral
axis depth.
𝑥
𝑏 ∗ 𝑥 ∗ = 𝛼 ∗ 𝐴𝑠(𝑑 − 𝑥)
2 𝑒
𝑥
300 ∗ 𝑥 ∗ = 24.54 ∗ 804.24(509 − 𝑥) by solving this equation, the neutral axis depth
2
becomes
𝑋 = 394.8𝑚𝑚.
7. Calculate the stress on the tension steel (𝜎𝑠).

The stress on the tension steel can be computed by taking moment about the level of compressive
force in the concrete.

𝜎𝑠 = (𝑑−𝑀𝑥)𝐴𝑠
3

47.23𝐾𝑁𝑚
𝜎𝑠 = 398.8𝑚𝑚 = 155.6N/mm2
(509𝑚𝑚− )804.24
3

According to ES EN1992-1-1:2015, Unacceptable cracking or deformation may be assumed to be

avoided if, under the characteristic combination of loads, the tensile stress in the reinforcement
does not exceed 𝑘3𝑓𝑦𝑘 .the recommended value of k3 is 0.8.
𝜎𝑠 = 155.6𝑁/𝑚𝑚2 ≤ 0.8𝑓𝑦𝑘 = 320𝑀𝑝𝑎………………ok!

8. Calculate ɛ𝑠𝑚 − ɛ𝑐𝑚

The difference between the mean strain in the reinforcement and the mean stain in the concrete
between cracks can be determined according to ES EN1992-1-1:2015 expression 7.9.
ɛ −ɛ = 1 [𝜎 − (𝑘 ) ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑘,𝑒𝑓𝑓) (1 + 𝛼 ∗ 𝜌 )] ≥ 0.6 ∗ 𝜎 /𝐸
𝑠𝑚 𝑐𝑚 𝑡 ( 𝑒 𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝑠 𝑠
𝐸𝑠 𝑠 𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓

AAiT Page 125

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where
ɛ𝑠𝑚 is the mean strain in the reinforcement under the relevant combination of loads, including the effect
of imposed deformations and taking into account the effects of Tension stiffening. Only the
additional tensile strain beyond zero strain in the concrete is considered,
ɛ𝑐𝑚 is the mean strain in the concrete between cracks,
𝛼𝑒 Es/Ecm which is 6.45.
σs is 155.6N/mm2,
Es is 200Gpa,
kt is a factor which depends on the duration of the load ,its values are 0.6 and 0.4 for short term
loading and long term loading respectively, Take 0.4 assuming long term loading.
𝑓𝑐𝑘,𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the cracks may
first be expected to occur: fct,eff = fctm or lower, (fctm(t)), if cracking is expected earlier than 28 days,
which is 2.6Mpa.
𝐴𝑠
𝜌𝑒𝑓𝑓 is the effective reinforcement ratio,
𝐴𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓

Ac,eff is the effective tension area,

As is the total cross-sectional area of bond reinforcement,402.12mm2.

The effective tension area of concrete can be obtained by multiplying the effective tension
reinforcement depth hc,eff by its width.

Figure 7-12 Effective tension area

2.5(ℎ − 𝑑)
ℎ𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 = { (ℎ − 𝑥)/3
ℎ/2

AAiT Page 126

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
2.5(550𝑚𝑚 − 509𝑚𝑚) = 102.5𝑚𝑚
550𝑚𝑚−394.8𝑚𝑚
ℎ𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 𝑚𝑖𝑛 { 3 = 77.6𝑚𝑚
550𝑚𝑚
= 275𝑚𝑚
2

ℎ𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 = 102.5𝑚𝑚 ,

𝐴𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 = ℎ𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 ∗ 𝑏 =23280mm2

𝐴𝑠 804.24𝑚𝑚2
𝜌 = = =0.03454
𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 𝐴𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓 23280𝑚𝑚2
𝑁
(2.6 )
𝑁 𝑚𝑚2 )(1+6.45∗0.03454)]
[155.6 −0.4∗( 𝑁
𝑚𝑚2 0.03454 155.6
ɛ −ɛ = 𝑁
≥0.6* 𝑚𝑚2
𝑁
𝑠𝑚 𝑐𝑚 200∗103 200∗103
𝑚𝑚2 𝑚𝑚 2

ɛ𝑠𝑚 − ɛ𝑐𝑚 = 0.0005939 ≥ 0.0004668

Therefore the value of ɛ𝑠𝑚 − ɛ𝑐𝑚 is 0.0005939.
9. Determine the maximum spacing of cracks,𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥.

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015, in situations where bonded reinforcement is fixed at

reasonably close centers within the tension zone (spacing ≤5(c+φ/2), spacing the maximum final
crack spacing may be calculated from Equation (7.11) of ES EN 1992-1-1:2015).
𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 3.4𝑐 + (0.425𝑘1 ∗ 𝑘2 ∗ ∅)/𝜌𝑐,𝑒𝑓𝑓

Where
c Is the cover to the reinforcement bar,
𝑘1 is a coefficient which takes account of the bond properties of the bonded reinforcement; its
values are 0.8 and 1.6 for high bond and bars with effective plane surface respectively,
𝑘2 Is coefficient which takes into account distribution of strains which is 0.5 for bending and
1.0 for pure tension,
∅ Is the bar diameter which 16mm.

𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 3.4 ∗ 41𝑚𝑚 + (0.425 ∗ 0.8 ∗ 0.5 ∗ 16𝑚𝑚)/0.03454

16𝑚𝑚
𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥 =218.15mm≤5 (41𝑚𝑚 + ) = 245𝑚𝑚……………..ok!
2

10. Calculate the crack width

The crack width should be obtained according to ES EN 1992:2015 expression 7.8.
𝑤𝑘 = 𝑠𝑟,𝑚𝑎𝑥(ɛ𝑠𝑚 − ɛ𝑐𝑚)

AAiT Page 127

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑤𝑘 = 218.15𝑚𝑚 ∗ 0.0005939 = 0.129𝑚𝑚
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 the maximum crack width for exposure class of XC3 is 0.4
mm. therefore the crack width is within the recommended limit.

7.6 Anchorage length and lap length

The reinforcing bars subject to direct tension as shown in Figure 7-13 must be firmly anchored if
it is not to be pulled out of the concrete. Bars subject to forces induced by flexure must be similarly
anchored to develop their design stresses. The anchorage depends on the bond between the bar and
the concrete, the area of contact and whether or not the bar is located in a region where good bond
conditions can be expected.

Figure 7-13 Anchorage bond

7.6.1 Ultimate bond stress

According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 8.4.2 the ultimate bond resistance shall be sufficient
to prevent bond failure. The design value of the ultimate bond stress, fbd, for ribbed bars may be
calculated using ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 expression 8.2.
𝑓𝑏𝑑 = 2.25𝑛1𝑛2𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑
Where

fctd Is design tensile strength of concrete calculated using ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 expression

3.16

n1 Is the coefficient related to the quality of the bond condition and the position of the bar
during concreting. n1= 1 when good conditions are obtained, and

n2 Is related to the bar diameter, for bar diameter ∅16 n2 = 1

𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑑 = 𝛼𝑐𝑡 𝑓𝑐𝑡𝑘,0.05⁄𝛾𝑐

AAiT Page 128

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where

𝛼𝑐𝑡 Is the coefficient taking long term effects on tensile strength and of unfavorable effects,
resulting from the way the load is applied. The recommended value according to ES
EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 3.1.6(2) P is 1.

For a concrete characteristic strength N/mm2 (C25/30), fctd = 1 ∗ 1.8⁄1.5 = 1.2Mpa

𝑓𝑏𝑑 = 2.25 ∗ 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 1.2𝑀𝑝𝑎=2.7Mpa

7.6.2 Basic anchorage length

According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 8.4.3, the calculation of the required anchorage length
shall take into consideration the type of steel and bond properties of bars. The basic required
anchorage length, lb,rqd, for anchoring the force As.fyd in s bar assuming bond stress equal to fbd is
given by ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 expression 8.3.
𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑 = (∅⁄4) ∗ (𝜎𝑠𝑑⁄𝑓𝑏𝑑)
For bar diameter ∅16 either for tension or compression reinforcement
𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑 = (16𝑚𝑚⁄4) ∗ (347.83⁄2.7)
𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑 = 515𝑚𝑚

7.6.3 Design anchorage length

Finally, the design anchorage length, lbd for bar diameter ∅16 either for tension or compression
reinforcement is calculated according to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 expression 8.4.
𝑙𝑏𝑑 = 𝛼1𝛼2𝛼3𝛼4𝛼5𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑 ≥ 𝑙𝑏,𝑚𝑖𝑛
Where

α1 Is for the effect of the form of the bars assuming adequate cover,

α2 Is the effect of concrete minimum cover,

α3 Is for the effect of confinement by transverse reinforcement,

α4 Is for the influence of one or more welded transverse bars (∅t>0.6∅) along the design
anchorage length,

α5 Is for the effect of pressure transverse to the plane of splitting along the design anchorage
length, and

lb,min Is the minimum anchorage length if no other limitation is applied, for anchorage in
tension: 𝑙𝑏,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚ax{0.3𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑; 10∅; 100𝑚𝑚}

AAiT Page 129

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑙𝑏,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚ax{0.3 ∗ 515𝑚𝑚; 10 ∗ 16𝑚𝑚; 100𝑚𝑚}
𝑙𝑏,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚ax{155𝑚𝑚; 160𝑚𝑚; 100𝑚𝑚}
𝑙𝑏,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 160𝑚𝑚
𝑙𝑏,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 165𝑚𝑚
To be conservative the values of α1, α2, α3, α4, and α5 is taken as 1. Therefore, the design
anchorage length:
𝑙𝑏𝑑 = 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 1 ∗ 515𝑚𝑚 > 165𝑚𝑚
𝑙𝑏𝑑 = 515𝑚𝑚 > 165𝑚𝑚……………. ok
Therefore, whenever it is possible for a bar diameter of ∅16, an anchorage length of 515mm should
be provided.

7.6.4 Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for beams

The anchorage of links and shear reinforcement should normally be effected by means of bends
and hooks, or by welded transverse reinforcement. A bar should be provided inside a hook or bend.
The anchorage should comply with Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for columns

7.6.5 Lab length

According to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 section 8.7, lapping is often necessary to transfer the forces
from one bar to another. Labs between bars should be staggered and should not occur in regions
of high stress. And also lapping should be done in a manner that transmission of forces form one
bar to the next bar is assured, spalling of the concrete in the neighborhood of the joints does not
occur and large cracks which affect the performance of the structure do not occur. Reinforcement
bars can be lapped with or without bends or hooks, welding and mechanical devices assuring load
transfer in tension-compression or in compression only. The length of the lap should be based on
the minimum anchorage length modified to take account factors such as cover, etc. And it is
calculated using ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 expression 8.10.
𝑙𝑜 = 𝛼1𝛼2𝛼3𝛼5𝛼6𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑 ≥ 𝑙𝑜,𝑚𝑖𝑛

AAiT Page 130

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Where
𝑙𝑜,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚ax{0.3𝛼6𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑞𝑑; 15∅; 200𝑚𝑚}

α6 (ρ1/25)0,5 but not exceeding 1,5, where ρ1 is the percentage of reinforcement lapped
within 0,65 l0 from the center of the lap length considered. Values of α6 are given in Table
ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 8.3.
α6= 1.4 for lapping in all direction
α6 = 1.5 for lapping in one direction
For diameter ∅16 lapping length should be:
𝑙𝑜 = 1.4 ∗ 515𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑙𝑜,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚ax{0.3 ∗ 1.4 ∗ 515𝑚𝑚; 15 ∗ 16; 200𝑚𝑚} for lapping in all
direction
𝑙𝑜 = 721𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑙𝑜,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 240𝑚𝑚 … … … … … … … … . . ok
𝑙𝑜 = 1.5 ∗ 515𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑙𝑜,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚ax{0.3 ∗ 1.5 ∗ 515𝑚𝑚; 15 ∗ 16; 200𝑚𝑚} for lapping in one
direction
𝑙𝑜 = 773𝑚𝑚 ≥ 𝑙𝑜,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 240𝑚𝑚 … … … … … … … … . . ok

AAiT Page 131

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

Chapter 8: Column Design

A column is a vertical structural member supporting axial compressive loads, with or without
moment. The cross-section dimensions of a column are generally considerably less than its height.
Columns supports vertical loads from the floor and roof and transmit these loads to the foundation.

8.1 Classification of columns

a) Based on lateral reinforcement

1. ‘Tied columns’ in which the main longitudinal bars are confined within closely spaced lateral
ties.

2. ‘spiral columns’ having main longitudinal reinforcements enclosed within closely spaced and
continuously wound spiral reinforcement.

Figure 8-1 Tied columns (a) and spiral columns(b)

b) Based on type of loading

1. Axially loaded columns: are columns which are not exposed to any moment in any direction,
that is the only action will be the axial load.

2. Uniaxial columns: are columns which are highly exposed to bending moment in one of the
direction rather than both directions in addition to the axial load.

3. Biaxial columns: are columns which are subjected to moment in both of direction besides the
axial load.

c) Based on degree of slenderness

1. Short column: are columns for which the strength is governed by the strength the materials
and the geometry of the cross section.in short columns, second-order effects are negligible.

AAiT Page 132

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
2. Slender column: when the unsupported length is long lateral deflection shall be so high that
the moments shall increase and weaken the column. Such a column, whose axial load carrying
capacity is significantly reduced by moment resulting from lateral deflection of the column,
is referred to as slender column.

8.2 Braced and unbraced columns

A column may be considered braced if the lateral loads, due to wind for example, are resisted by
shear walls or some other form of bracing rather than by the column. A column may be considered
to be unbraced if the lateral loads are resisted by the sway action of the column.

(a) (b)
Figure 8-2 (a) Braced columns (b) Unbraced columns

8.3 Second order effects on columns

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 5.8 second order effects are additional action caused
by structural deformation. Second order effects may be ignored if they are less than 10% of the
corresponding first order or satisfice the following criteria.

8.3.1 Simplified criteria for second order effects

8.3.1.1 Slenderness criteria
According to EN ES 1992-1-1:2015 section 5.8.3.1 second order effects may be ignored if the
slenderness 𝜆 is below a certain 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 value.

𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 ∗ 𝐴 ∗ 𝐵 ∗ 𝐶⁄
√𝑛
Where

𝐴 1⁄
(1 + 0.2𝜑 𝑒𝑓 ) ( if 𝜑𝑒𝑓 is not known ,𝐴 =0.7 may be used),

𝐵 √1 + 2𝜔 (if 𝜔 is not known, 𝐵 =1.1 may be used),

𝐶 1.7 − 𝑟𝑚 (if 𝑟𝑚 is not known,𝐶 =0.7 may be used),

AAiT Page 133

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

𝜑𝑒𝑓 Effective creep ratio ,

𝜔 Mechanical reinforcement ratio,

𝑛 𝑁𝐸𝑑
⁄(𝐴 ∗ 𝑓 ) ; relative normal force ,
𝑐 𝑐𝑑

𝑟𝑚 𝑀01
⁄𝑀 ;moment ratio ,and
02

𝑀01, 𝑀02 are the first order of moments,|𝑀02| ≥ |𝑀01|.

In cases with biaxial bending, the slenderness criterion may be checked separately for each
direction. Depending on the outcome of this check, second order effects (a) may be ignored in both
directions, (b) should be taken into account in one direction, or (c) should be taken into account in
both directions.
8.3.1.2 Slenderness and effective length
The slenderness ratio is defined as follows:
𝑙
𝜆 = 0⁄𝑖
Where

𝑙0 is the effective length, and

𝑖 is the radius of gyration of the un cracked concrete section

Figure 8-3 Examples of different buckling modes and corresponding effective

AAiT Page 134

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
For compression members in regular frames, the slenderness criterion should be checked with an
effective length 𝑙0 determined in the following way.
Braced members

𝑘1 𝑘2
𝑙0 = 0.5𝑙 ∗ √(1 + ) ∗ (1 + )
0.45 + 𝑘1 0.45 + 𝑘2
Un Braced members

𝑘1 ∗ 𝑘2
√1 + 10 ∗
𝑘1 + 𝑘2
𝑙0 = 𝑙 ∗ 𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑘2
(1 + 𝑘1 ) ∗ (1 + )
{ 1 + 𝑘1 1 + 𝑘2
Where

𝑘1, 𝑘2 are the relative flexibilities of rotational restraints at ends 1 and 2 respectively,

𝑘 (𝜃⁄𝑀) ∗ (𝐸𝐼⁄𝑙) ,

𝜃 is the rotation of restraining members for bending moment 𝑀,

𝐸𝐼 is the bending stiffness of compression members, and

𝑙 is the clear height of compression member between end restraints.

Note: 𝑘 = 0 is the theoretical limit for rigid rotational restraint, and 𝑘 = ∞ represents the limit for
no restraint at all. Since fully rigid restraint is rare in practice, a minimum value of 0.1 is
recommended for 𝑘1and 𝑘2.
Method of analysis
If 𝜆 > 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 the second order effect must be analyzed using the following method.
a. Second order analysis based on nominal stiffness, and
b. Method based on estimation of curvature.

8.4 Design for cover

The recommended procedure for the determination of the nominal concrete cover is the same as
the procedure used for slab in chapter 2 section 2.2.2 of this document and for beam in chapter 7
section 7.2.1.

AAiT Page 135

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Cmin, dur, according to ES EN 1992-1.1:2015 table 4.4N, for a structural class of four and
exposure XC1 (dry or permanently wet). The minimum concrete cover is 15mm. this applies for
both longitudinal and shear reinforcements.
20𝑚𝑚
Longitudinal reinforcement, 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 15𝑚𝑚
10𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 20𝑚𝑚, allowing for in design deviation, ∆c,dev=10mm
The nominal concrete cover, 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 𝑐𝑚𝑖𝑛 + ∆𝑐𝑑𝑒𝑣 = 20𝑚𝑚 + 10𝑚𝑚 = 30𝑚𝑚 Shear
8𝑚𝑚
reinforcement, 𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 15𝑚𝑚
10𝑚𝑚
𝐶𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 15𝑚𝑚, allowing for in design deviation, ∆c,dev=10mm
The nominal concrete cover, 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 𝑐𝑚𝑖𝑛 + ∆𝑐𝑑𝑒𝑣 = 15𝑚𝑚 + 10𝑚𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚
It can be seen from the above calculation that the nominal concrete cover for the shear
reinforcement governs. Therefor the provided nominal cover for our beam is , 𝐶𝑛𝑜𝑚 = 25𝑚𝑚.

8.4.1 Check for fire resistance

According to ES EN 1992-1.2:2015 table 5.2(a) for standard fire resistance of R60, the
recommended Column width bmin /axis distance a of the main bars for Column exposed on more
than one side and 𝜇𝑓𝑖 = 0.7 are bmin =350mm and a = 40mm. therefore the nominal concrete
cover, Cnom =25mm provided is also satisfactory for R60 fire resistance. And also the minimum
column section of our project is 400mm*400mm, this complies with the minimum width of column
required for R60 fire resistance.
Where

𝜇𝑓𝑖 is a reduction factor for the design load level in the fire situation.

8.5 Longitudinal reinforcement

The general procedure followed to calculate longitudinal reinforcement are:
1. calculate first order moment
2. calculate the effective length and radius of gyration
3. calculate the slenderness ratio and slenderness limit and check for second order effect
4. calculate the accidental eccentricity
5. calculate equivalent first order moment
6. calculate equivalent first order moment with addition of accidental eccentricity moment

AAiT Page 136

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
7. if slenderness limit is greater than slenderness ratio calculates the longitudinal
reinforcement using the moment and in 6 if not use one of the two second order analysis to
calculate the additional moment due to second order effect and add to the moment in 6 to
calculate longitudinal reinforcement.
8. Calculate 𝐴𝑠using moment in 7 and axial force.
9. Check for 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 and 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑎𝑥 .

8.5.1 First order moment

First order moment are moments coming from ETABS analysis of the building and those moments
are due to the load effect of the structure. Table 8-1 shows the result of first order moment form
ETABS for column 13.
Table 8-1 First order moment and axial force from ENVX for column 13

Column Moment 𝑀3 = 𝑀𝑦(kNm) 𝑀2 = 𝑀𝑥(kNm) 𝑁𝐸𝑑 (kN)

Ground floor 𝑀02 -229.238 95.158

5678.59
𝑀01 -103.78 48.5879

1st floor 𝑀02 194.7 -14.63

5139.6
𝑀01 2.02 -93.0167

2nd floor 𝑀02 170.8838 -79.95

4595.32
𝑀01 -55.9925 17.2021

3rd floor 𝑀02 160.0693 -67.4438

4057.32
𝑀01 -82.2931 31.4286

4th floor 𝑀02 148.0836 -62.0338

3530.38
𝑀01 -108.0431 30.7124

5th floor 𝑀02 103.8225 -43.8578

3005.31
𝑀01 -83.84 36.4148

AAiT Page 137

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

𝑀01 -29.9169 -7.161

Roof 𝑀02 32.19 -21.75
35.09
𝑀01 22.20 -5.40

8.5.2 Effective length and radius of gyration

8.5.2.1 effective length
The effective length, 𝑙0 of a member is defined as the length of a pin-ended strut with constant
normal force having the same cross-section and buckling load.
Sample calculation of effective length for ground floor column
In the x-direction
For un Braced members
𝑘1 𝑘2
𝑙 = 0.5𝑙 ∗ √(1 + ) ∗ (1 + )
0 0.45+𝑘1 0.45+𝑘2

Where 𝑙 = 1.95𝑚, 𝑘1 = 0.1 𝑏𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑖𝑡 𝑖𝑠 𝑟𝑖𝑔𝑖𝑑 and 𝑘2 is calculated as follow

𝐸𝐼
)𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛
𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 (𝑙
𝑘= ∑ 2∗𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 = 𝐸𝐼
∑(2∗ )𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚
𝑙
800∗8003
𝐼𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 = = 3.4 ∗ 1010𝑚𝑚4
12
300∗550 3
𝐼𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 = = 0.42 ∗ 1010𝑚𝑚4
12
𝐸∗3.4∗1010𝑚𝑚4
( )
𝑘2 = 1950𝑚𝑚 = 4.056
𝐸∗0.42∗1010𝑚𝑚4 𝐸∗0.42∗1010𝑚𝑚4
(2∗ )+(2∗ )
3760𝑚𝑚 4080𝑚𝑚

𝑙0 = 1711𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 138

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
In the y direction
𝑘1 𝑘2
𝑙 = 0.5𝑙 ∗ √(1 + ) ∗ (1 + )
0 0.45+𝑘1 0.45+𝑘2

Where 𝑙 = 1.95𝑚, 𝑘1 = 0.1 𝑏𝑒𝑐𝑎𝑢𝑠𝑒 𝑖𝑡 𝑖𝑠 𝑟𝑖𝑔𝑖𝑑 and 𝑘2 is calculated as follow

𝐸𝐼
)𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛
𝐶𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 (𝑙
𝑘= ∑ 2∗𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 𝑠𝑡𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑛𝑒𝑠𝑠 = 𝐸𝐼
∑(2∗ )𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚
𝑙
800∗8003
𝐼𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 = = 3.4 ∗ 1010𝑚𝑚4
12
300∗550 3
𝐼𝑏𝑒𝑎𝑚 = = 0.42 ∗ 1010𝑚𝑚4
12
𝐸∗3.4∗1010𝑚𝑚4
( )
𝑘2 = 1950𝑚𝑚 = 6.77
𝐸∗0.42∗1010𝑚𝑚4 𝐸∗0.42∗1010𝑚𝑚4
(2∗ )+(2∗ )
5900𝑚𝑚 6300𝑚𝑚

𝑙0 = 1721𝑚𝑚
8.5.2.2 Radius of gyration
𝐼𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 10 4
𝑖=
√ ⁄ = √3.4 ∗ 10 𝑚𝑚 ⁄ = 230.94𝑚𝑚
𝐴𝑐,𝑐𝑜𝑙𝑢𝑚𝑛 800 ∗ 800𝑚𝑚 2

Table 8-2 effective length and radius of gyration of c-13

column 𝑘1 𝑘2 𝑙0(mm) 𝑖(mm)

X y x y x y
Ground 0.1 0.1 4.117352 6.410896 1712.032 1721.152 2.31E+02
1stfloor 3.029749 4.717452 3.029749 4.717452 2562.894 2591.665 2.31E+02
2ndfloor 3.029749 4.717452 3.029749 4.717452 2562.894 2591.665 2.31E+02
3rdfloor 1.775983 4.717452 1.775983 2.765284 2512.503 2573.694 2.02E+02
4thfloor 1.775983 2.765284 1.775983 2.765284 2512.503 2555.597 2.02E+02
5thfloor 0.958632 2.765284 0.958632 1.492631 2429.156 2523.907 1.73E+02
6thfloor 0.958632 1.492631 0.958632 1.492631 2429.156 2491.814 1.73E+02
7thfloor 0.958632 1.492631 0.958632 1.492631 2429.156 2491.814 1.73E+02
8thfloor 0.958632 1.492631 0.958632 1.492631 2429.156 2491.814 1.73E+02
9thfloor 0.189359 1.492631 0.189359 0.294841 2133.349 2356.936 1.15E+02
10thfloor 0.189359 0.294841 0.189359 0.294841 2133.349 2213.856 1.15E+02
Roof 0.189359 0.294841 0.590712 0.919765 2242.256 2320.574 1.15E+02

AAiT Page 139

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
8.5.3 slenderness ratio, slenderness limit and check for second order effect
8.5.3.1 slenderness limit
sample calculation for ground floor column
In the x direction

𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 ∗ 𝐴 ∗ 𝐵 ∗ 𝐶⁄ ,
√𝑛
Where 𝐴 = 0.7 , 𝐵 = 1.1 and 𝐶and 𝑛 are calculated as followed
𝐶 = 1.7 − 𝑟𝑚
𝑀
𝑟𝑚 = 01⁄ = −103.78𝑘𝑁𝑚⁄
𝑀02 −229.2385𝑘𝑁𝑚 = 0.453
𝐶 = 1.7 − 𝑟𝑚 = 1.7 − 0.453 = 1.247
𝑁
𝑛 = 𝐸𝑑⁄ = 5678.59𝑘𝑁 𝑁 = 0.626
(𝐴𝑐 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑑) ⁄640000𝑚𝑚2 ∗ 14.167
𝑚𝑚2

𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 ∗ 0.7 ∗ 1.1 ∗ 1.247⁄ = 24.27

√0.626
In the y direction

𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 ∗ 𝐴 ∗ 𝐵 ∗ 𝐶⁄ ,
√𝑛
Where 𝐴 = 0.7 , 𝐵 = 1.1 and 𝐶and 𝑛 are calculated as followed
𝐶 = 1.7 − 𝑟𝑚
𝑀
𝑟𝑚 = 01⁄ = 48.5879𝑘𝑁𝑚⁄
𝑀02 95.1568𝑘𝑁𝑚 = 0.51
𝐶 = 1.7 − 𝑟𝑚 = 1.7 − 0.51 = 1.19
𝑁
𝑛 = 𝐸𝑑⁄ = 5678.59𝑘𝑁 𝑁 = 0.626
(𝐴𝑐 ∗ 𝑓𝑐𝑑) ⁄640000𝑚𝑚2 ∗ 14.167
𝑚𝑚2

𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 = 20 ∗ 0.7 ∗ 1.1 ∗ 1.19⁄ = 23.162

√0.626
8.5.3.2 slenderness ratio
sample calculation for ground floor column
in the x direction
𝑙
𝜆 = 0⁄𝑖 = 1711𝑚𝑚⁄230.94𝑚𝑚 = 7.409
in the y direction
𝑙
𝜆 = 0⁄𝑖 = 1721𝑚𝑚⁄230.94𝑚𝑚 = 7.452

AAiT Page 140

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
8.5.3.3 check for second order effect
for both directions
𝜆 < 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 … … … 𝑛𝑜 𝑛𝑒𝑒𝑑 𝑜𝑓 𝑠𝑒𝑐𝑜𝑛𝑑 𝑜𝑟𝑑𝑒𝑟 𝑒𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑐𝑡
Table 8-3 slenderness ratio, slenderness limit and check for second order effect

column 𝑙0(mm) 𝑖(mm) 𝜆 𝜆𝑙𝑖𝑚 remark

x y X y x y
Ground 1712.032 1721.152 2.31E+02 7.41E+00 7.45E+00 24.27168 23.14496 ok
ok
1st 2562.894 2591.665 2.31E+02 1.11E+01 1.12E+01 34.56013 37.98946
ok
2nd 2562.894 2591.665 2.31E+02 1.11E+01 1.12E+01 43.86194 41.42829
ok
3rd 2512.503 2573.694 2.02E+02 1.24E+01 1.27E+01 50.97169 49.86408
ok
4th 2512.503 2555.597 2.02E+02 1.24E+01 1.26E+01 59.96189 54.17408
ok
5th 2429.156 2523.907 1.73E+02 1.40E+01 1.46E+01 67.07358 67.6824
ok
6th 2429.156 2491.814 1.73E+02 1.40E+01 1.44E+01 71.64693 71.64693
ok
7th 2429.156 2491.814 1.73E+02 1.40E+01 1.44E+01 80.46497 80.43505
ok
8th 2429.156 2491.814 1.73E+02 1.40E+01 1.44E+01 97.3329 99.43063
ok
9th 2133.349 2356.936 1.15E+02 1.85E+01 2.04E+01 115.5708 119.042
ok
10th 2133.349 2213.856 1.15E+02 1.85E+01 1.92E+01 152.5672 151.255
ok
Roof 2242.256 2320.574 1.15E+02 1.94E+01 2.01E+01 250.108 359.3702
NB: As we can see in the above Table 8-3 no need of second order effect for our columns.

8.5.4 accidental eccentricity

is the effects of cracking, creep, non-linear material properties and geometric imperfections, which
normally means considering the structure being constructed ‘out of plumb’ (not vertical), which
in isolated members is allowed for by introducing an additional eccentricity,𝑒𝑖 of the axial load.

𝑒𝑖 = 𝑙0 and the moment introduced is 𝑀𝑖 = 𝑒𝑖 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝑑

400

Sample calculation for accidental eccentricity moment for ground floor column
In the x direction
1.711𝑚
𝑒𝑖 = 𝑙0 = = 0.004275𝑚
400 400

AAiT Page 141

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
𝑀𝑖 = 𝑒𝑖 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝑑 = 0.004275𝑚 ∗ 5678.59𝑘𝑁 = 24.276𝑘𝑁𝑚
In the y direction
1.721𝑚
𝑒𝑖 = 𝑙0 = = 0.004275𝑚
400 400

𝑀𝑖 = 𝑒𝑖 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝑑 = 0.0043𝑚 ∗ 5678.59𝑘𝑁 = 24.43𝑘𝑁𝑚

8.5.5 equivalent first order moment

Classic analyses of buckling commonly considers the deformation of a pinned ended strut,
but this is not the normal configuration of a column in a building. A normal column built
monolithically into a structure at its top and bottom will deform, and be subjected to moments
like those shown in Error! Reference source not found.. It will be seen that the section of the c
olumn between the points
of contra-flexure in the final state of the column may be considered to be a pinned ended strut
equivalent to that for which the analysis was carried out. The distance between the points of
contra-flexure is the effective length of the column. The maximum moment due to deflection
will be seen to occur at mid-height of the effective column. This will normally be somewhere
close to mid-height of the real column. Clearly, the total moment to which the critical section
is subjected is made up of the maximum moment due to the deflection plus the first-order
moment at this height plus any allowance for accidental effects.

Figure 8-4 Moment and deformation of a braced isolated column

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 5.8.8.2 a reasonable estimate of the first-order moment
near mid-height of the column is given by

AAiT Page 142

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

𝑀𝑜𝑒 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {0.6 ∗ 𝑀02 + 0.4 ∗ 𝑀01

0.4 ∗ 𝑀 02
But, their no need of calculation of equivalent moment in our building because our columns are
short columns. And the design moment is the moment due to first order effects, 𝑀𝐸𝐷, being
numerically equal to the sum of the larger elastic end moment, 𝑀02 , plus any moment due to
geometric imperfection, 𝑀𝑖 .( Chanakya Arya, Concrete, steelwork, masonry and timber designs
to British Standards and Eurocodes)
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 6.1(4) For reinforced concrete cross-sections
subjected to a combination of bending moment and compression, the design value of the bending
moment should be at least 𝑀𝐸𝐷 = 𝑒0 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝐷 where 𝑒0= h/30 but not less than 20 mm where h is
the depth of the section.
𝑀02 + 𝑀𝑖
𝑀𝐸𝐷 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {
𝑒0 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝐷
Sample calculation of design moment for ground floor
In the x direction
229.23𝑘𝑁𝑚 + 24.276𝑘𝑁𝑚 253.506𝑘𝑁𝑚
𝑀𝐸𝐷 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 800𝑚𝑚 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 253.506𝑘𝑁𝑀
30 ∗ 5678.59𝑘𝑁 151.43𝑘𝑁𝑚
In the y direction
95.157𝑘𝑁𝑚 + 24.43𝑘𝑁𝑚 119.587𝑘𝑁𝑚
𝑀𝐸𝐷 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 800𝑚𝑚 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { = 151.43𝑘𝑁𝑀
30 ∗ 5678.59𝑘𝑁 151.43𝑘𝑁𝑚

Table 8-4 Design moment and moment accidental eccentricity

column 𝑁𝐸𝐷(kN) 𝑀02(kNm) 𝑀𝑖(kNm) 𝑒0 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝐷(kNm) 𝑀𝐸𝐷(kNm)

x y x y y x
Ground 5678.59 229.238 95.158 24.30 24.43 151.6184 253.54 151.62
1st 5139.6 194.7 93.017 32.93 33.30 137.2273 227.63 137.23
2nd 4595.32 170.8838 79.95 29.44 29.77 122.695 200.33 122.70
3rd 4057.32 160.0693 67.4438 25.49 26.11 93.31836 185.55 93.55
4th 3530.38 148.0836 62.0338 22.18 22.56 81.19874 170.26 84.59
5th 3005.31 103.8225 43.8578 18.25 18.96 60.1062 122.07 62.82
6th 2501.2 114.5386 49.25 15.19 15.58 50.02392 129.73 64.83
7th 2004.04 97.85 42.77 12.17 12.48 40.0808 110.02 55.25
8th 1514.39 93.56 43.88 9.20 9.43 30.28781 102.76 53.31
9th 1020.64 41.95 18.78 5.44 6.01 20.41281 47.39 24.79

AAiT Page 143

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

10th 527.597 43.37 10.7 2.81 2.92 10.55195 46.18 13.62

Roof 35.09 32.19 21.75 0.20 0.20 0.7018 32.39 21.95

8.5.6 Calculate 𝑨𝒔using 𝑴𝑬𝑫

Using interaction charts prepared for biaxial bending. The procedure involves:
𝑑2 𝑏2
1. using, 𝑑 and 𝑏 evaluate , to choose appropriate chart.
2 2 ℎ ℎ 𝑁𝐸𝑑
2. Compute Normal force ratio: 𝑣 = , Moment ratios: 𝜇 𝑠𝑑 𝑀𝐸𝐷
𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏∗ℎ = 𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏∗ℎ 2

3. Enter the chart and pick ω (the mechanical steel ratio).

ω∗𝐴𝑐∗𝑓𝑐𝑑
4. Compute𝐴𝑠 , 𝐴𝑠 = 𝑓𝑦𝑑

sample calculation for ground floor column

𝑑 𝑏
𝑑 = 43𝑚𝑚, 𝑏 = 43 𝑎𝑛𝑑 2 , 2 = 0.053 ≅ 0.1
2 2 ℎ ℎ

Figure 8-5 Reinforced column section

𝑁𝐸𝑑 5678.59𝑘𝑁
𝑁 = 5678.59𝑘𝑁 , 𝑣 = = = 0.626 ≅ 0.7
𝐸𝑑 𝑓𝑐𝑑∗𝑏∗ℎ 14.167∗800∗800

𝑀𝑒𝑑,𝑦 = 253.506𝑘𝑁𝑚 , 𝜇 𝑠𝑑,𝑦 = 253.506 = 0.0349 ≅ 0.035

14.167∗800∗8002

𝑀𝑒𝑑,𝑥 = 151.43𝑘𝑁𝑚 , 𝜇 𝑠𝑑,𝑥 = 151.43

= 0.0208 ≅ 0.021
14.167∗800∗8002

Using the above data ω = 0 which means use minimum longitudinal reinforcement.
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 9.5.2(2) minimum longitudinal reinforcement is
0.1 ∗ 𝑁𝐸𝑑
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 𝑓𝑦𝑑
0.002 ∗ 𝐴𝑐
0.1∗5678.59𝑘𝑁
2
𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 347.826𝑀𝑝𝑎 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 1632.59𝑚𝑚 = 1632.59𝑚𝑚2
2
0.002 ∗ 800 𝑚𝑚 2 1280𝑚𝑚 2

AAiT Page 144

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
Table 8-5 Area of longitudinal reinforcement

column 𝑁𝐸𝐷(kN) 𝑀𝐸𝐷(kNm) 𝑣 𝜇𝑠𝑑,𝑦 𝜇𝑠𝑑,𝑥 ω 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 (mm2)

Y x
Ground 5678.59 253.54 151.62 0.6263 0.034955 0.020903 0 1632.595
1st 5139.6 227.63 137.23 0.566854 0.031382 0.018919 0 1477.635
2nd 4595.32 200.33 122.70 0.506825 0.027618 0.016915 0 1321.155
3rd 4057.32 185.55 93.55 0.584474 0.038186 0.012897 0 1166.48
4th 3530.38 170.26 84.59 0.508566 0.035038 0.011662 0 1014.985
5th 3005.31 122.07 62.82 0.589263 0.039892 0.008661 0 864.0268
6th 2501.196 129.73 64.83 0.490419 0.042394 0.008938 0 720
7th 2004.04 110.02 55.25 0.39294 0.035954 0.007618 0 720
8th 1514.39 102.76 53.31 0.296932 0.03358 0.00735 0 720
9th 1020.641 47.39 24.79 0.450272 0.052271 0.003418 0 320
10th 527.5974 46.18 13.62 0.232758 0.050937 0.001878 0 320
Roof 35.09 32.39 21.95 0.015481 0.03572 0.003027 0 320

8.5.6.1 Number of bar

𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 1632.595mm2
𝑁= =
𝑎𝑠 = 5.196 ≅ 6∅20
102 ∗ 𝜋
Table 8-6 Number of bars for longitudinal reinforcement

Column 𝐴𝑠,𝑚𝑖𝑛 (mm2) 𝑁

Ground 1632.595 8∅20

1st 1477.635 8∅20

2nd 1321.155 8∅20

3rd 1166.48 8∅16

4th 1014.985 8∅16

5th 864.0268 8∅14

6th 720 8∅14

AAiT Page 145

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

7th 720 8∅14

8th 720 8∅14

9th 320 8∅14

10th 320 8∅14

Roof 320 8∅14

8.6 Transverse reinforcement

According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 9.5.3 The diameter of the transverse reinforcement
(links, loops or helical spiral reinforcement) should not be less than 6 mm or one quarter of the
maximum diameter of the longitudinal bars, whichever is the greater. The diameter of the wires of
welded mesh fabric for transverse reinforcement should not be less than 5 mm. The transverse
reinforcement should be anchored adequately
Check for diameter of transverse reinforcement
6𝑚𝑚
∅𝑡 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 {20 < ∅𝑡,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 8𝑚𝑚 … … … … . . 𝑜𝑘
4 𝑚𝑚
The spacing of the transverse reinforcement along the column should not exceed 𝑆𝑐𝑙,𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥.
Check for spacing
The value of 𝑆𝑐𝑙,𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥 for use in a Country may be found in its National Annex. The recommended
value is the least of the following three distances:

• 20 times the minimum diameter of the longitudinal bars

• the lesser dimension of the column

• 400 mm
20 ∗ 14𝑚𝑚
𝑆𝑐𝑙,𝑡𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 400𝑚𝑚 > 𝑆𝑐𝑙,𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑣𝑖𝑑𝑒𝑑 = 200𝑚𝑚 … … … … . . 𝑜𝑘
400𝑚𝑚

AAiT Page 146

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22
8.7 Detailing
8.7.1 Lap length
According to ES EN 1992-1-1:2015 section 8.7.1 Forces are transmitted from one bar to another
by: lapping of bars, with or without bends or hooks, welding and mechanical devices assuring load
transfer in tension-compression or in compression only. The detailing of laps between bars shall
be such that:
• the transmission of the forces from one bar to the next is assured;
• spalling of the concrete in the neighborhood of the joints does not occur;
• large cracks which affect the performance of the structure do not occur.
The design lap length is:
𝑙0 = 𝛼1 ∗ 𝛼2 ∗ 𝛼3 ∗ 𝛼5 ∗ 𝛼6 ∗ 𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑒𝑞 ≥ 𝑙0,𝑚𝑖𝑛
𝛼1, 𝛼2, 𝛼3, 𝛼5, 𝛼6 = 1.5
∅∗𝜎𝑠𝑑
𝑙 = where, 𝑓 = 2.7𝑀𝑝𝑎, 𝜎 = 347.826𝑀𝑝𝑎
𝑏,𝑟𝑒𝑞 4∗𝑓𝑏𝑑 𝑏𝑑 𝑠𝑑

Table 8-7 Summary lap length for column

∅ (mm) 𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑒𝑞 (mm) 𝑙0 (mm) provided lap length

14 450.89 680

16 515.3 775

20 644.13 970

Check for minimum

0.3 ∗ 𝑙𝑏,𝑟𝑒𝑞
𝑙0,𝑚𝑖𝑛 > 𝑚𝑎𝑥 { 15 ∗ ∅ < 𝑙0 … … … … ok
200𝑚𝑚
8.7.2 Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for columns
Anchorage of links and shear reinforcement for columns is the same as that of for beams in section
7.6.4.

AAiT Page 147

Structural Design of G+5 Building with Commentaries 2021/22

AAiT Page 148